Cover
Introduction
Getting Started
Basic Shooting and Image Playback
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
Image Settings
Advanced Operations
Flash Photography
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
Shooting Movies
Handy Features
Image Playback
Post-Processing Images
Printing Images
Customizing the Camera
Reference
Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals / Downloading Images to Your Computer

Canon 760D User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for 760D by Canon which is a product in the Digital Cameras category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Canon EF 85mm f/1.8 USM Manual

Canon 5D + EF 24-105mm + EF 100-400mm Kit Manual

Canon 105 Manual

Canon MF3010 Manual

Canon LBP7010C Manual

EOS REBEL T6S (W)

EOS 760D (W)

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

The EOS REBEL T6S or EOS 760D is a digital single-lens reflex

camera featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx. 24.2 effective

megapixels, DIGIC 6, high-precision and high-speed 19-point AF

(cross-type AF point: max. 19 points), approx. 5.0 fps continuous

shooting, Live View shooting, Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie

shooting, and Wi-Fi/NFC function.

Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following

To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety

Precautions” (p.20-22) and “Handling Precautions” (p.23-25).

Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further

Familiarize Yourself with the Camera

While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they

come out. You can then better understand the camera.

Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability

After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been

properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the

images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon

cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

Copyrights

images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory

card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that

certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography

even for private enjoyment.

Introduction

Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your

camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

* Battery Charger LC-E17 or LC-E17E is provided. (The LC-E17E comes with a

power cord.)

The Instruction Manuals and CD-ROMs provided are listed on the next p age.

If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.

Depending on the Lens Kit type, l ens i nstruction manuals may also be

included.

Be careful not to lose any of the abo ve items.

Item Check List

Battery Pack

LP-E17

(with protective cover)

Battery Charger

LC-E17/LC-E17E*

Wide Strap

Camera

(with eyecup and body cap)

Interface Cable

The instruction manual consists of a booklet and electronic manuals

(PDF files on the CD-ROM). The booklet is the Basic Instruction

Manual. For more detailed instructions, see the Camera Instruction

Manual on the CD-ROM.

Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

Contains the following manuals (PDF files):

• Camera Instruction Manual

• Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction Manual

• Quick Reference Guide

Instructions for viewing the Camera Instruction Manual

CD-ROM are on pages 416-417.

EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (Software CD-ROM)

Contains software such as image-editing software and

Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files).

For more information and installation procedures of the

software, see pages 420-421.

Instructions for viewing the Software Instruction Manual

are on page 422.

Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs

Camera and Wi-Fi/NFC Function

Basic Instruction Manual

The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity: If the

card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or

computer, format the card with this camera (p.65).

• SD memory cards

• SDHC memory cards*

• SDXC memory cards*

* UHS-I cards supported.

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD

Speed Class 6 “ ” or higher.

If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may

not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card

with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.

If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need

an even faster card.

To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card

manufacturer’s Web site.

Compatible Cards

Cards that Can Record Movies

In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory

cards, and SDXC memory cards.

*The camera does not come with a card for recording images/

movies. Please purchase it separately.

Quick Start Guide

1Insert the battery (p.38).

To charge the battery, see page 36.

2Insert the card (p.39).

With the card’s label facing

toward the back of the

camera, insert it into the

card slot.

3Attach the lens (p.47).

Align the lens’s white or red mount

index with the camera’s mount

index of the same color.

4Set the lens focus mode switch

to <f> (p.47).

5Set the power switch to <1>,

then set the Mode Dial to <A>

(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.76).



T urn the Mode Dial while holding down

the lock release button at the center.

All the necessary camera settings

will be set automatically.

White index Red index

Quick Start Guide

6Flip out the LCD monitor (p.41).

When the LCD monitor displays the

date/time/zone setting screens, see

page 44.

7Focus on the subj ect (p.52).

Look through the viewfinder and

aim the viewfinder center over the

subject.

Press the shutter button halfway,

and the camera will focus on the

subject.

If necessary , the built-in flash will be

raised.

8Take the picture (p.52).

Press the shutter button completely

to take the picture.

9Review the picture.

The captured image will be

displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD

monitor.

To display the image again, press

the <x> button (p.107).

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View

Shooting” (p.201).

To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.107).

To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.318).

Icons in this Manual

<6> : Indicates the Main Dial.

<5> : Indicates the Quick Control Dial.

<W><X><Y><Z> : Indicates the direction of the shift or move

when the key on the Quick Control Dial is

pressed.

<0> : Indicates the Setting button.

0, 9, 7, 8: Indicates that each function remains active

for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec. after

you let go of the button.

* In this manual, the icons and markings i ndicating the camera’s buttons, dials,

and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the

LCD monitor.

3: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the

<M> button to change its settings.

When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that the

function is available only in the Creative Zone modes (p.31).

(p.**) : Reference page numbers for more information.

: Warning to prevent shooting problems.

: Supplemental information.

: Tips or advice for better shooting.

: Troubleshooting advice.

Basic Assumptions

All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch

is set to <1> and the <R> switch is set to the left (Multi

function lock released) (p.55).

It is assumed that all the menu settings, Custom Functions, etc. are

set to their defaults.

The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.

Conventions Used in this Manual

Chapters

Introduction 2

Getting Started 35

Basic Shooting and Image Playback 75

Setting the AF and Drive Modes 109

Image Settings 125

Advanced Operation s 157

Flash Photography 175

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live V iew Shooting)

201

Shooting Movies 233

Handy Features 271

Image Playback 291

Post-Processing Images 325

Printing Images 333

Customizing the Camera 349

Reference 361

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /

Downloading Images to Your Computer 415

Contents at a Glance

Shooting

Shoot automatically  p.75-106 (Basic Zone modes)

Shoot continuously  p.122 (i Continuous shooting)



Take a picture of yourself in a group

 p.124 (j Self-timer)

Freeze the action  p.160 (s Shutter-priority AE)

Blur the action

Blur the background  p.82 (C Creative Auto)



Keep the background in sharp focus

 p.162 (f Aperture-priority AE)



Adjust the image brightness (exposure)

 p.169 (Exposure compensation)

Shoot in low light  p.76, 176 (D Flash photography)

p.132 (ISO speed setting)

Shoot without flash  p.81 (7 Flash Off)

p.99 (b Flash off)

Shoot fireworks at night  p.166 (Bulb exposure)



Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor

 p.201 (A Live View shooting)

Use Creative filters  p.210 (Creative filters)

Shoot movies  p.233 (k Movie shooting)

Image Quality



Shoot with image effects matching the subject

 p.135 (Picture Style)

Make a large-size print of the picture  p.126 (73, 83, 1)

Take many pictures  p.126 (7a, 8a, b, c)

AF (Focusing)



Change the AF area selection mode

 p.114

(

AF area selection mode)

Shoot a moving subject  p.89, 91, 112 (AI Servo AF)

Playback

View the images on the camera  p.107 (x Playback)

Search for pictures quickly  p.292 (H Index display)

p.293 (I Image browsing)

Rate images  p.298 (Ratings)

Prevent important images  p.316 (K Image protect)

from accidental deletion

Delete unnecessary images  p.318 (L Delete)



Auto play back images and movies

 p.308 (Slide show)



View the photos or movies on a TV set

 p.312 (Video OUT)



Adjust the LCD monitor brightness

 p.274 (LCD monitor brightness)

Apply special effect to images  p.326

(Creative filters

)

Printing

Print pictures easily  p.333 (Direct printing)

Power

Battery

• Charging  p.36

• Installing/Removing  p.38

• Battery check  p.43

• Checking battery

information  p.364

Household power outlet  p.365

Auto power off  p.42

Cards

Installing/Removing  p.39

Formatting  p.65



Release shutter without card

 p.272

Lens

Attaching/Detaching  p.47

Zoom  p.48

Image Stabilizer  p.50

Basic Settings

Dioptric adjustment  p.51

Language  p.46

Date/Time/Zone  p.44

Beeper  p.272

LCD Monitor

Using the LCD Monitor  p.41

LCD auto off/on  p.285

Brightness adjustment  p.274

Touch screen  p.62

Recording Images



Creating/Selecting a folder

 p.275

File numbering  p.277

AF operation  p.110

AF area selection mode  p.114

AF point selection  p.116

Manual focusing  p.121

Drive

Drive mode  p.122

Continuous shooting  p.122

Self-timer  p.124

Maximum burst  p.128

Image Quality

Image-recording quality  p.126

Picture Style  p.135

White balance  p.142

Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.146

Noise reduction for long

exposures  p.148

Noise reduction for high

ISO speeds  p.147



Lens aberration correction

 p.150

Reducing flicker  p.154

Highlight tone priority  p.353

Color space  p.156

Shooting

Shooting mode  p.31

Feature guide  p.73

ISO speed  p.132

Aspect ratio  p.130

Bulb  p.166

Metering mode  p.167

Mirror lockup  p.173

Remote control  p.366

Index to Features

Exposure Adjustment

Exposure compensation  p.169

AEB  p.170

AE lock  p.172

Flash

Built-in flash  p.176

External flash  p.181

Flash function settings  p.183

Wireless shooting  p.189

Live View Shooting

Live View shooting  p.201

AF operation  p.216

AF method  p.218

Continuous AF  p.214

Touch Shutter  p.226

Creative filters  p.210

Movie Shooting

Movie shooting  p.233

AF method  p.218

Movie recording size  p.245

Movie Servo AF  p.263

Sound recording  p.266

Manual exposure  p.237

Still photo shooting  p.242

Digital zoom  p.248

HDR movies  p.249

Miniature Effect Movies  p.251

Video snapshot  p.253

Playback

Image review time  p.273

Single-image display  p.107

Shooting information

display  p.320

Index display  p.292

Image browsing

(Jump display)  p.293

Magnified view  p.294

Image rotate  p.297

Rating  p.298

Movie playback  p.304

Slide show  p.308



Viewing images on a TV set

 p.312

Protect  p.316

Erase  p.318

Image Editing

Creative filters  p.326

Resize  p.329

Cropping  p.331

Printing  p.336

Customization



Custom Functio ns (C.Fn)

 p.350

My Menu  p.360

Software  p.415

Wi-Fi/NFC function

 Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction

Manual

Introduction 2

Item Check List................................................................................. 3

Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs ................................................... 4

Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5

Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6

Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8

Chapters........................................................................................... 9

Contents at a Glance ...................................................................... 10

Index to Featur es ......... .... ... .................................... ....................... 12

Contents......................................................................................... 14

Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 20

Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 23

Nomenclature................................................................................. 26

Getting Started 35

Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 36

Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 38

Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 39

Using the LCD Monitor ................................................................... 41

Turning on the Power..................................................................... 42

Setting the Date, Time, and Zone................................................... 44

Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 46

Attaching and Detaching a Lens..................................................... 47

Lens Image Stabilizer..................................................................... 50

Basic Operation.......................... .................................................... 51

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions....................................... 57

3 Menu Operations.................................................................. 59

d Using the Touch Scre en.................... ......................................... 62

Formatting the Card ....................................................................... 65

Switching the LCD Monitor Display................................................ 67

lDisplaying the Grid ................................................................... 69

Q Displaying the Electronic Level............................................... 70

Displaying the Flicker Detection..................................................... 72

Feature Guide ..................... ........................................................... 73

Contents

Basic Shooting and Image Playback 75

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................76

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)..........................79

7 Disabling Flash .........................................................................81

C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................82

2 Shooting Portraits ......................................................................86

3 Shooting Lands ca p es ............ .... ...............................................87

4 Shooting Close-u ps................................................. ...................88

5 Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................89

8: Special Scene Mode .............................................................90

C Shooting Children ......................................................................91

P Shooting Food ............................................................................92

x Shooting Candl el ight Portrait s ........... ........................................93

6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ....................................94

F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)............................................95

G Shooting Backlit Scenes............................................................96

Q Quick Control................... .................................... ......................98

Shoot by Ambience Selection.......................................................100

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type..................................................104

x Image Playback ......................................................................107

Setting the AF and Drive Modes 109

f: Changing the Autofocus Operation (AF operation)................110

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point.......................................114

AF Area Selection Modes .............................................................117

Subjects Difficult to Focus on........................................................120

MF: Manual Focus ................. ....................................................121

i Selecting the Drive Mode ........................................................122

j Using the Self- time r ............. ... .................................... .............124

Image Settings 125

Setting the Image-Recording Quality............................................126

Changing the Imag e’s Aspect Ratio............... ...............................130

g: Changing the ISO Speed to Suit the Light............................132

Contents

A Selecting a Picture Style ...................... ... .... ......................... 135

A Customizing a Picture Style ................................................. 137

A Registering a Pictu re Style................... ... .... ......................... 140

B: Matching the Light Source (White balance)......................... 142

u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source......................... 144

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting Optimizer)

... 146

Setting Noise Reduction............................................................... 147

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations......... 150

Reducing Flick e r.................. .... ..................................................... 154

Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color space) .................. 156

Advanced Operations 157

d: Program AE............ .... ............................................................ 158

s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement (Shutter priority AE)..... 160

f: Changing th e Depth of Field (Aperture priority AE) ............. 162

Depth-of-F iel d Pr ev ie w....................... ................................... .... 164

a: Manual Exposure................................................................... 165

q Changing the Metering Mode (Metering mode)...................... 167

Setting Exposure Compensation (Exposure comp.) .................... 169

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ................................................. 170

A Locking the Exposure (AE Lock)............................................. 172

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake..................................... 173

Flash Photography 175

D Using the Built-in Flash............................................................. 176

D Using an External Speedlite ..................................................... 181

Setting the Flash .......................................................................... 183

Using Wireless Flash.................................................................... 189

Easy Wireless Flash Shooting...................................................... 192

Custom Wireless Flash Shooting ................................................. 195

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)

201

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor .............................................. 202

Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 208

Contents

U Applying Creative Filters .........................................................210

Menu Function Settings ................................................................214

Changing the Autofocus Operation (AF operation).......................216

Using AF to Focus (AF Method) ...................................................218

x Shooting wi th the Touc h Shutter.............................................226

MF: Focusing Manually.................................................................228

Shooting Movies 233

k Shooting Movies .....................................................................234

Autoexposure Shooting..............................................................234

Manual Exposure Shooting........................................................237

Shooting Still Photos ........................ .... ......................................242

Shooting Function Settings...........................................................244

Setting the Movie Recording Size.................................................245

Using Movie Digital Zoom.............................................................248

Shooting HDR Movies...................................................................249

Shooting Miniature Effect Movies .................................................251

Shooting Video Snapshots............................................................253

Menu Function Settings ................................................................263

Handy Features 271

Handy Features ............................................................................272

Disabling the Beeper..................................................................272

Card Reminder...........................................................................272

Setting the Image Review Time .................................................273

Setting the Auto Power-off Time ................................................273

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness .......................................274

Creating and Sele ct in g a Folde r............................. ... .................275

File Numbering Methods............................................................277

Setting Copyright Information.....................................................279

Auto Rotatio n of Vertical Images................................................281

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings............................282

Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically......285

Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color...........................285

Contents

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning................................................... 286

Appending Dust Delete Data........................................................ 287

Manual Sensor Cleanin g......... ... .................................................. 289

Image Playback 291

x Searching for Images Quickly ................................................ 292

u/y Magnified View................................................................... 294

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen ........................................ 295

b Rotating the Image.................................................................. 297

Setting Ratings............................................................................. 298

Q Quick Control for Playback .............. ....................................... 300

k Enjoying Movies..................................................................... 302

k Playing Back Movies.............................................................. 304

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 306

Slide Show (Auto Playback)......................................................... 308

Viewing Images on a TV Set........................................................ 312

K Protecting Images................................................................... 316

L Erasing Image s........................................................................ 318

B: Shooting Information Display ............................................. 320

Post-Processing Images 325

U Applying Creative Filters......................................................... 326

S Resizing JPEG Images........................................................... 329

N Cropping JPEG Images.......................................................... 331

Printing Im a ge s 333

Preparing to Print........................ .... .............................................. 334

w Printing................ ................................................................... 336

Cropping the Image ................................................................... 341

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 343

W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images ................................. 346

p Specifying Images for a Photobook......................................... 347

Contents

Customizing the Camera 349

Setting Custom Functions.............................................................350

Custom Function Settings.............................................................352

C.Fn I : Exposure .....................................................................352

C.Fn II : Image ..........................................................................353

C.Fn III : Autofocus/Driv e...........................................................354

C.Fn IV : Operation/Others.........................................................357

Registering My Menu....................................................................360

Reference 361

B Button Functions.......... .... ... .................................................362

Checking the Battery Information..................................................364

Using a Household Power Outlet..................................................365

Remote Control Shooting..............................................................366

H Using Eye-Fi Cards.................................................................368

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode...............................370

System Map............................................ ......................................376

Menu Settings...............................................................................378

Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................385

Error Codes................. ..................................................................399

Handling Precautions: STM Lenses (Kit Lenses) .........................400

Specifications................................................................................401

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /

Downloading Images to Your Computer 415

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM........................416

Downloading Images to a Computer.............................................418

Software Overview........................................................................420

Installing the Software...................................................................421

Software Instruction Manual .........................................................422

Index .............................................................................................423

The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to

yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow

these precautions before using the product.

If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the

product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer

from whom you purchased the product.

To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,

follow the safeguards below:

• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the

Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.

• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or solder

to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the battery

to strong physical shock.

• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.

• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable ambient

temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharging time indicated in the

Instruction Manual.

• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,

accessories, connecting cables, etc.

When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent

contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent a fire or an

explosion.

If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,

immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.

Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.

If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it

immediately . Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire, electrical

shock or skin burn if you keep using it.

Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can

cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or

clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a

physician immediately.

Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the

insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the

camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause

skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is

recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when

using the camera in very hot places.

Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an

accident.

Safety Precautions

Warnings Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or

serious injuries may re sult.

Safety Precautions

Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When

using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away.

When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery and

disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing. This is to prevent

electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, or corrosion.



Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an explosion or

a fire.

If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do

not touch the internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.

Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause

electrical shock.

Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.

Doing so may damage your vision.



Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. S traps

or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury

may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera pa rt or accessory. If

a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.

Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, store the

battery with its protective cover attached to prevent short-circuit. This is to prevent a

fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, or burn.

Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.

Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s

instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.

To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:

• Always insert the power plug all the way in.

• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.

• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.

• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.

Also do not twist or tie the cords.

• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.

• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.

Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet with

a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty , humid, or oily , the dust on the power outlet may

become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.



Do not conn ec t the b atter y direc tly to an e lectrical ou tlet or a ca r’s cigarette lighter outlet.

The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing a fire, burns or injuries.

A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the

product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.

Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.

Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap attached.

Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.

Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and

cause the casing to deform or catch fire.

Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water or

metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery . This is to prevent a fire and

an electrical shock.

Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.

Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.

Safety Precautions

Do not use or store the product inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source.

The product may become hot and cause skin burns. Doing so may also cause battery

leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or shorten the life of the

product.

Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause

injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.

Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of

time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.

Never play the provided CD-ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD-ROM.

If you use it in a music CD player, you may damage the speakers and other

components. When using headphones, there is also a risk of injury to your ears from

excessively loud volume.

Cautions Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical

injury or property damage may result.

Camera Care

This camera is a precision in strument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical

shock.

The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you

accidentally drop th e camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon

Service Center. Wipe off any water dr oplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the

camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.

Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such

as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near

anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong

magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.

Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct

sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to

disassemble the camera yourself.

Do not block the buil t-in flash, mirror operati on with your finger, etc. Doing so

may cause a malfunction.

Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and

focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean

the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest

Canon Service Center.

Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to

prevent the contacts from corroding. Corr oded contacts can cause camera

misoperation.

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,

condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent

condensation , first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to

the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.

If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid

damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and

battery from the ca mera, and wait u nt il conden satio n has evap orat ed befo re

using the camera.

If the camera will not be used for an extende d period, remove the battery

and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the

camera is in storage, press the shutt er button a few times once in a while to

check that the camera is still working.

Handling Precautions

Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and

corrosion such as in a chemical lab.

If the camera has n ot bee n used f or a n ext ended perio d, te st a ll i ts functions

before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is

an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera

checked by your nearest Canon Serv ice Center or check the camera

yourself and make sure it is working properly.

If you use continuous shooting, Live View sh ooting, or movie shooting for a

prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.

If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting

may occur.

LCD Panel and LCD Monitor

Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision

technology with over 99.99% ef fective pixels, t here may be a few dead pixels

displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.

Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.

If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonge d period, scree n burn-in may occu r

where you see remnants of what wa s displayed. However, this is only

temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.

The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black

in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.

Cards

To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,

physical shock, or vibration.

Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything

metallic.

Do not affi x any stickers, etc., on the card.

Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,

such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having

static ele ct ricity.

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.

Store the card in a case.

Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

Handling Precautions

Smudges Adhering to the Front of the Sensor

Besides dust entering th e camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant from the

camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If visible spots

remain on the image, having the sensor clean ed by a Canon Service Center is

recommended.

Lens

After det ach ing the lens from t he camera, put down the lens

with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to avoid

scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.

Contacts

26
Nomenclature
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam 
(p.176/113)
Mode Dial (p.31)
<g> ISO speed 
setting button (p.132)
<6> Main Dial 
(p.53)
Shutter button 
(p.52)
Remote control 
sensor 
(p.173, 366)
Grip
Mirror
 (p.173, 289)
Contacts (p.25)
Lens mount
Lens lock pin
<Y> External microphone 
IN terminal (p.266)
<F> Remote control 
terminal (p.367)
<q/C>
Audio/vi deo OUT/
Digital terminal (p.315, 334, 418)
<D> HDMI mini OUT 
terminal (p.312)
Depth-of-field preview 
button (p.164)
Lens release button 
(p.48)
Red-eye 
reduction/Self-
timer lamp 
(p.177/124)
EF Lens mount index (p.47 )
Built-in 
microphones 
(p.234)
Flash sync contacts
Hot shoe (p.181)
<D> Flash button  
(p.176)
<V> Focal plane mark 
(p.88)
Speaker 
(p.304)
Strap mount 
(p.35)
Body cap (p.47)
EF-S Lens mount index 
(p.47)
Terminal 
cover
<B> AF area 
selection button (p.115)
<U> LCD panel 
illumination button 
(p.55)
Mode Dial lock-release 
button (p.53)

27
Nomenclature
Display-off sensor (p.67, 285)
Viewfinder eyepiece
Eyecup (p.367)
<B> Info button 
(p.67, 107, 204, 239, 362)
<M> Menu 
button (p.59)
LCD monitor/
Touch screen 
(p.59, 273/
62, 295, 306)
Tripod socket
<x> Playback button (p.107)
<5> Quick Control Dial (p.54)
<WB> White balance selection button (p.142)
<XA> Picture Style selection button (p.135)
<YQi> Drive mode selec tion button (p. 122, 124)
<Zf> AF operation selection button (p.110)
<Q> Quick Control button  (p.57)
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.51)
<A> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting button (p.201/234)
<A/I> AE lock/
FE lock button/Index/
Reduce button
 (p.172/179/292, 294)
<S/u>
AF point selection/
Magnify button 
(p.116/294)
<L> Erase button (p.318)
Card slot (p.39)
Power switch 
(p.42)
p (N-Mark)
Serial number
Access lamp 
(p.40)
DC cord hole 
(p.365)
Card slot cover 
(p.39)
Battery compartment cover 
release lever (p.38)
Battery compartment cover 
(p.38)
<0> Setting button (p.59)
Multi function lock switch 
(p.55)

Nomenclature

Shooting Function Settings (in Creative Zone modes, p.31)

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Shutter speed

Multi function lock (LOCK) (p.55)

Exposure level indicator

Exposure compensation

amount (p.169)

AEB range (p.170)

Multi function lock (LOCK) (p.55)

Shooting mode

Picture Style

(p.135)

AF operation (p.110)

One-Shot AF

AI Focus AF

AI Servo AF

Manual Focus

Quick Control icon

(p.58)

Battery check (p.43)

zxcn

White balance (p.142)

QAuto

WDaylight

EShade

RCloudy

YTungsten light

UWhite fluorescent light

IFlash

OCustom

Eye-Fi transmission status (p.368)

Drive mode (p.122, 124)

uSingle shooting

iContinuous shooting

BSilent single shootin g

MSilent conti nuo us shoo ti ng

QSelf-timer:10 sec./Remote control

lSelf-timer:2 sec.

qSelf-timer:Continuous

uWhite balance correction (p.144)

BWhite balance bracketing (p.145)

Multi Shot Noise Reduction (p.147)

Possible shots

during WB bracketing

Possible shots

Image-record ing quality

(p.126)

73 Large/Fine

83 Large/Normal

74 Medium/Fine

84 Medium/Normal

7aSmall 1/Fine

8aSmall 1/Normal

bSmall 2 (Fine)

cSmall 3 (Fine)

1+73

RAW+Large/Fine

1RAW

Metering mo de (p.1 67)

qEvaluative metering

wPartial metering

rSpot metering

eCenter-weighted average

metering

yFlash exposure

compensation

(p.178, 199)

Highlight tone priority

(p.353)

ISO speed (p.132)

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.146)

Aperture

Multi function lock (LOCK) (p.55)

AF area sele ction mode (p.114)

Self-timer countdown

GPS connection indi cat or

Nomenclature

LCD Panel

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Shutter speed

Bulb exposure mode (buLb)

FE lock (FEL)

Busy (buSY)

Built-in flash recyclin g (buSY)

Multi function lock warning (L)

No card warning (Card)

Card error (Card)

Card full warning (FuLL)

Error code (Err)

Cleaning image sens or (CLn)

AF point selection

(MAF, SEL N, SEL AF)

Aperture

Exposure level indicator

Exposure compensation amount

(p.169)

AEB range (p.170)

Battery check (p.43)

Wi-Fi function

Possibl e shots

Self-timer countdown

Bulb exposure time

Possible shots

during WB brac keting

Card error warning (Err)

Error numb er

ISO speed (p.132)

<A> Highlight tone priority

(p.353)

<g> ISO speed (p.132)

Nomenclature

Viewfinder Information

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Shutter speed

Bulb exposure mo de (buLb)

FE lock (FEL)

Busy (buSY)

Built-in flash recycling (D buSY)

Multi function lock warning (L)

No card warning (Card)

Card error (Card)

Card full warning (FuLL)

Error code (Err)

Spot metering circle (p.167)

Single-po int AF (Manual se lection) (p.114)

Focusing screen

Area AF frame

(p.114)

Electronic level

(p.71)

<A> AE lock/AEB

in-progress

<D> Flash-ready

Improper FE l ock wa rn i ng

<e> High-speed sync

<d> FE lock/FEB in-progress

<y> Flash exposure

compensation

Aperture (p.162)

Exposure level indicator

Exposure compensation amount

AEB range

Red-eye reduction lamp ON

<A> Highlight tone priority

ISO speed

<0> Monochrome

shooting

Maximum burst

<o> Focus indicator

White

balance

correction

<g>

ISO speed

Flicker detection

(p.72, 154)

Grid (p.69) AF point (p.114)

19-point automatic selection AF

(p.114)

Zone AF (Manual select ion of zone) (p .114)

Aspect ratio line

(p.130)

AF point selection

(M AF, SEL N, SEL AF)

Nomenclature

Mode Dial

You can set the shooting mode. T urn the Mode Dial while holding down

the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button).

Basic Zone

All you do is press the shutter button.

The camera sets everything to suit the

subject or scene for shooting.

Creative Zone

These modes give you more control for

shooting various subjects as desired.

d: Program AE (p.158)

s: Shutter-priority AE (p.160)

f: Aperture-priority AE (p.162)

a: Manual exposure (p.165)

A: Scene Intelligent Auto (p.76)

7: Flash Off (p.81)

C: Creative Auto (p.82)

2: Portrait (p.86)

3: Landscape (p.87)

4: Close-up (p.88)

5: Sports (p.89)

8: Special scene (p.90)

C: Kids (p.91)

P: Food (p.92)

x: Candlelight (p.93)

6: Night Portrait (p.94)

F: Handheld Night Scene (p.95)

G: HDR Backlight Control (p.96)

Nomenclature

Lens without a Distance Scale

Focusing ring (p.121, 228)

Focus mode switch (p.47)

Zoom position index (p.48)

Hood mount (p.49)

Filter thread

(front of lens)

Zoom ring (p.48)

Image Stabilizer switch (p.50)

Lens mount index (p.47)

Contacts (p.25)

Zoom ring lock lever

(p.48)

Nomenclature

Battery Charger LC-E17

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 (p.36).

Battery Charger LC-E17E

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 (p.36).

Power plug

Charge lamp

Full-charge lamp

Battery pack slot

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter

of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

Power cord

Power cord socket

Battery pack slot

Charge lamp

Full-charge lamp

Getting Started

This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start

shooting and basic camera operations.

Attaching the Provided Strap

Pass the end of the strap through

the camera’s strap mount eyelet

from the bottom. Then pass it

through the strap’s buckle as shown

in the illustration. Pull the strap to

take up any slack and make sure

the strap will not loosen from the

buckle.

The eyepiece cover is also

attached to the strap (p.367).

Eyepiece cover

1Remove the protective cover.

Detach the protective cover provided

with the battery.

2Attach the battery.

As shown in the illustration, attach the

battery securely to the charger.

To detach the battery, follow the

above procedure in reverse.

3Recharge the battery.

For LC-E17

As shown by the arrow, flip out the

battery charger’s prongs and insert

the prongs into a power outlet.

For LC-E17E

Connect the power cord to the

charger and insert the plug into a

power outlet.

Recharging starts automatically and

the charge lamp lights up in orange.

When the battery is fully recharged,

the full-charge lamp will light up in

green.

It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge a completely

exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time

required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on

the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.

For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /

41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hours).

Charging the Battery

LC-E17

LC-E17E

Full-charge lamp

Charge lamp

Charging the Battery

Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.

Charge the battery before use.

Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be

used.

Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose

its capacity.

After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the

charger from the power outlet.

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small

amount of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge

and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover

(provided) attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may

lower the battery’s performance.

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/

60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available

plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any

portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can

damage the battery charger.

If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully

charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.

Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.364) and purchase a

new battery.

Tips for Using the Battery and Cha rge r

After di sconnecting t he charger’s power plug , do not tou ch the prong s for

at least 5 sec.

Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP-E17.

Battery Pack LP-E17 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with

an incompati ble battery charger or product may result in malfunct i on or

accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.

Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17 into the camera. The

camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed, and

darkens when the battery is removed.

1Open the cover.

Slide the lever as shown by the

arrows and open the cover.

2Insert the battery.

Insert the end with the battery

contacts.

Insert the battery until it locks in

place.

3Close the cover.

Press the cover until it snaps shut.

Open the cover and remove the

battery.



Press the battery release lever as shown

by the arrow and remove the battery.



To prevent short circuiting of the battery

contacts, be sure to attach the protective

cover (provided, p.36) to the battery.

Installing and Removing the Battery

Installing the Battery

Removing the Battery

After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to forcefully

swing it back further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.

The card (sold separately) can be an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory

card. SDHC and SDXC memory cards with UHS-I can also be used.

The captured images are recorded onto the card.

Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to

enable writing and erasing.

1Open the cover.

Slide the cover as shown by the

arrows to open it.

2Insert the card.

As shown by the illustration, face

the card’s label side toward you

and insert it until it clicks in place.

3Close the cover.

Close the cover and slide it in the

direction shown by the arrows until it

snaps shut.

When you set the power switch to

<1>, the number of possible shots

will be displayed on the LCD panel.

Installing and Removing the Card

Installing the Card

Write-protect switch

Possible shots

The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the

card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.

Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent

you from shooting without a card inserted (p.272).

Installing and Removing the Card

1Open the cover.

Set the power switch to <2>.

Make sure the access lamp is off,

then open the cover.

If [Recording...] is displayed, close

the cover.

2Remove the card.

Gently push in the card, then let go to

eject it.

Pull the card straight out, then close

the cover.

Removing the Card

Access lamp

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are

being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being

transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also,

never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or

blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.

• Removing the card.

• Removing the battery.

• Shaking or banging the camera around.

• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when the AC Adapter

Kit is used).

If the card already cont ains recorded i mages, the image number may no t

start from 0001 (p.277).

If a card-related error me ssage is displa yed on the L CD monitor, remove

and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.

If you can transfer all the images on th e card to a computer, transfer all

the images and then format the card with the camera (p.65). The card

may then return to normal.

Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do

not expose the conta cts to dust or water. If a smudge adheres to the

contacts, contact failure may result.

Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).

After you flip out the LCD monitor , you can set menu functions, use Live

View shooting, shoot movies, and play back images and movies. You

can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.

1Flip out the LCD mo nitor.

2Rotate the LCD monitor.

When the LCD monitor is swung out,

you can rotate it up, down, or over

180° to face the subject.

The indicated angle is only

approximate.

3Face it toward you.

Normally, use the camera with the

LCD monitor facing you.

Using the LCD Monitor

180°

175°

90°

Be careful not to force and break t he hinge when rotating the LCD

monitor.

When Remote Switch RS-60E3 or an external microphone is connected

to the camera, the rotation angle range of the flipped out LCD monitor

will be limited.

When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor wi th the screen

facing inward. This will protect the screen.

During Live Vie w shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor

toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen.

If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting

screen appears, see page 44 to set the date/time/zone.

<k> : The camera turns on. You can

shoot movies (p.234).

<1> : The camera turns on. You can

shoot still photos.

<2> : The camera is turned off and

does not operate. Set to this

position when not using the

camera.

Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, sensor

cleaning will be executed automatically. (A small sound may be

heard.) During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will display

<f>.

You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter

button halfway (p.52) to stop cleaning and take a picture.

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short

interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and

not a malfunction.

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after

approx. 30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again,

just press the shutter button halfway (p.52).

You can change the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]

(p.273).

Turning on the Power

Automatic Sensor Cleani ng

3 Auto Power Off

If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to

the card, [ Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn of f af ter t he

recording finishes.

Turning on the Power

When the power is turned on, the battery level will be indicated in one of

the four levels.

H: Battery level is sufficient.

I: Battery level is low, but the

camera can still be used.

v: Battery will be exhauste d soon.

(Blinks)

w: Recharge the battery.

Number of Possible Shots (Approx. number of shots)

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, no Live

View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing

standards.

Possible shots with Batt ery Grip BG-E18 (sold separately)

• With LP-E17 x 2: approx, twice the shots without the battery grip.

z Checking the Battery Level

Temperature Room Te mperature

(23°C / 73°F) Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

No Flash 550 470

50% Flash Use 440 400

Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner:

• Pressing the shutter but ton halfway for a prolonged period.

• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.

• Using the LCD monitor frequently.

The number of possible shot s may decrease depending on the actual

shooting conditi ons.

The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on

the lens used, the battery power may exhaust faster.

For the number of possible shots with Live V i ew shooting, see page 203.

See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery’s condition (p.364).

When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone are

reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow the steps

below , making sure to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time

zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply

change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination, and the

camera will automatically adjust the date/time.

Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based

on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.

1Display the menu screen.

Press the <M> button to display

the menu screen.

2Under the [52] tab, select [Date/

Time/Zone].

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the [52] tab.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[Date/Time/Zone], then press <0>.

3Set the time zone.

[London] is set by default.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the time zone box.

Press <0> so <a> is displayed.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the time zone, then press <0>.

(Returns to .)

3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 60-61.

In step 3, the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time

difference compared with Coordinated Universal T i me (UTC). If you do

not see your time zone, set the ti me zone while referrin g to the diff erence

with UTC.

3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

4Set the date and time.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the number.

Press <0> so <a> is displayed.

Press the <W> <X> keys to set the

number, then press <0>. (Returns

to .)

5Set the daylight saving time.

Set it if necessary.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select [

Press <0> so <a> is displayed.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[Z], then press <0>.

When the daylight saving time is set

to [Z], the time set in step 4 will

advance by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the

daylight saving time will be canceled

and the time will go back by 1 hour.

6Exit the setting.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

[OK], then press <0>.

The date/time/zone and daylight

saving time will be set and the menu

will reappear.

The date/time/zone settings may be reset in the following cases. If this

happens, set the date/time/ zone again.

• When the camera is stored without the battery.

• When the camera’s battery becomes exhausted.

• When the camera is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a

prolonged period.

The date/time that were set will start when you select [OK] in step 6.



After changing the time zone, check that the correct date and time are set.

1Display the menu screen.

Press the <M> button to display

the menu screen.

2Under the [52] tab, select

[LanguageK].

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the [52] tab.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[LanguageK], then press <0>.

3Set the desired language.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the language, then press <0>.

The interface language will change.

3 Selecting the Interface Language

The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. The

camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.

1Remove the caps.

Remove the rear lens cap and the

body cap by turning them as shown

by the arrows.

2Attach the lens.

Align the lens’s red or white index

with the camera’s index matching the

same color. Turn the lens as shown

by the arrow until it clicks in place.

3Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <AF>.

<AF> stands for autofocus.

<MF> stands for manual focus.

4Remove the front lens cap.

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Attaching a Lens

White index

Red index

Minimizing Dust

When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.

When storing the ca mera without a lens attached, be sure to attach t he

body cap to the camera.

Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Turn the zoom ring on the lens

with your fingers.



If you want to zoom, do it before

focusing. Turning the zoom ring afte r

achieving focus m a y throw off the focus.

While pressing the lens release

button, turn t he len s as sh own by

the arrow.



T urn the lens until it stops, then detach it.

Attach the rear lens cap to the

detached lens.

To owners of the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens or

EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS lens:

You can prevent the lens from extending out while you are carrying it

around. Set the zoom ring to the 18mm wide-angle end, then slide the

zoom ring lock lever to <LOCK>. The zoom ring can be locked only at

the wide-angle end.

Zooming

Detaching the Lens

Do not look at the sun directly th rough any lens. Doing so may cause

loss of vision.



When attach ing or deta ching a lens, se t the camera’ s power swit ch to <

If the front pa rt (focusing ring) of the lens rot ates du ring autofocusing , do

not touch the rotating part.

If you purchased a lens kit with the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

lens, EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens, or EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6

IS STM lens, see “Handling Precautions” on p age 400.

Angle of View

Since the image sensor size is smaller

than the 35mm film format, the angle

of view of an attached lens will be

equivalent to that of a lens with approx.

1.6x of the focal length indicated.

Image sensor size (Approx.)

(22.3 x 14.9 mm /

0.88 x 0.59 in.)

35mm image size

(36 x 24 mm /

1.42 x 0.94 in.)

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

A lens hood can block unwanted light and prevent rain, snow , dust, etc.

adhering to the front of the lens. When storing the lens in a bag, etc.,

you can also attach the hood in reverse.

If there is no index mark on the lens and hood:

Attach the lens hood.

T urn the hood as shown by the arrow

to attach it securely.

If there is an index mark on the lens and hood:

1Align the red dots on the hood

and lens edges, then turn the

hood as shown by the arrow.

2Turn the hood as shown in the

illustration.

Turn the hood clockwise until it

attaches securely.

Attaching a Lens Hood

If the hood is not attached properly, it may obstruct the image’s

periphery, making the image look dark.

When attaching or detaching the hood, grasp the base of the hood to

turn it. Grasping the hood’s edges to turn it may deform the hood,

resulting in failure to turn.

When using the camera’s built-in flash, detach the hood. Otherwise, the

hood will obstruct part of the flash.

When you use the IS lens’s built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is

corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is

based on the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.

* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.

1Set the IS switch to <1>.

Set also the camera’s power switch to

<1>.

2Press the shutter button halfway.

The Image Stabilizer will operate.

3Take the picture.

When the picture looks steady in the

viewfinder, press the shutter button

completely to take the picture.

Lens Image Stabilizer

The Image Stabilizer will not be effective if the subject moves during the

exposure.

For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to <2>. If <1> is set, Image

Stabilizer misoperation may occur.

The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as

on a rocki ng boat.

The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens’s focus mode switch set

to either <AF> or <MF>.

When using a tripod, you can still shoot with the IS switch set to <1>

with no problem. However, to save battery power, setting the IS switch to

<2> is recommended.

The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a

monopod.

With the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens, EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6

IS STM lens, EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM lens, or EF-S18-200mm

f/3.5-5.6 IS lens, the Image Stabilizer mode will be s witched

automatically to suit the shooting conditions.

Turn the dioptric ad justment

knob.

Turn the knob left or right so that the

AF points in the viewfinder look the

sharpest.

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera

shake.

1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.

2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.

3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.

4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.

To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahe ad of the othe r.

6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.

Basic Operation

Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity

Holding the Camera

If the camera dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder

image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is

recommended.

Vertical shooting

Horizontal shooting

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 201.

Basic Operation

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button

halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing Hal fway

This activates autofocusing and the

automatic exposure system that sets the

shutter speed and aperture.

The exposure setting (shutter speed and

aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder

and on the LCD panel (0).

Pressing Completely

This releases the shutter and takes the

picture.

Preventing Camera Shake

Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called

camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,

note the following:

• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.

• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the

shutter button completely.

Shutter Button

If you press the shutter bu tton completely without pressing it halfway

first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it

completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes

the picture.

Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can

instant ly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button

halfway.

Basic Operation

Turn the dial while holding down

the lock release butto n at the

center of the dial.

Use it to set the shooting mode.

(1) Af ter pressing a button, turn the

<6> dial.

After pressing a button such as <g>

<WB> <XA> <YQi> <Zf>,

turn the <6> dial to change the setting.

For the <g> button, the function

remains selected for 6 sec. (9) after

pressing the button.

When the function selection ends or if

you press the shutter button halfway, the

camera will be ready to shoot.



Use this dial to select or set the ISO

speed, white balanc e, Picture S tyle, drive

mode, AF operation, AF point, etc.

(2) Turn the <6> dial only.

While looking at the viewfinder or LCD

panel, turn the <6> dial to change the

setting.

Use this dial to set the shutter speed,

aperture, etc.

Mode Dial

6 Main Dial

The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set to

the right (Multi function lock, p.55, 359).

Basic Operation

(1) Af ter pressing a button, turn the

<5> dial.

After pressing a button such as <g>

<WB> <XA> <YQi> <Zf>,

turn the <5> dial to change the setting.

For the <g> button, the function

remains selected for 6 sec. (9) after

pressing the button.

When the function selection ends or if

you press the shutter button halfway, the

camera will be ready to shoot.

Use this dial to select or set the ISO

speed, white balance, Picture Style,

drive mode, AF operation, AF point,

etc.

(2) Turn the <5> dial only.

While looking at the viewfinder or LCD

panel, turn the <5> dial to change the

setting.

Use this dial to set the exposure

compensation amount, the aperture

setting for manual exposures, etc.

(3) Af ter pressing a button, press the

<W>, <X>, <Y>, or <Z> key.

After pressing the <M> or <Q>

button, press the <W> <X> or <Y>

<Z> keys to set menus or Quick Control

functions.

5 Quick Control Dial

The operations in (1) an d (3) are possible even when the <R> switch is

set to the right (Multi f unction lock, p.55, 359).

Basic Operation

By setting [13: Multi function lock] under [54: Custom Functions

(C.Fn)] (p.359) and moving the <R> switch to the right, you can

prevent the Main Dial and Quick Control Dial from moving and changing

a setting inadvertently.

<R> switch set to the left:

Lock released

<R> switch set to the right:

Lock engaged

Turn on (9) or off the LCD panel

illumination by pressing the button.

During a bulb exposure, pressing the

shutter button completely will turn off the

LCD panel illumination.

R Multi Function Lock

U LCD Panel Illumination

If the <R> switch is set to the right and yo u try to use on e of the lo cked

camera controls, <L> will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD

panel. On the shooting settings display (p.5 6), [LOCK] will be displayed.

Basic Operation

After you press the button a number of times, the shooting

function settings will be displayed.

With the shooting function settings displayed, you can turn the Mode

Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode.

Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting

function settings (p.57).

Press the button again to turn off the display.

Displaying Shooting Func ti on Se ttings

You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the

LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.

1Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

2Set the desired functions.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to select a function.

The selected function and Feature

guide (p.73) will appear.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to

change the setting.

3Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

The captured image will be displayed.

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Basic Zone modes Creative Zone modes

For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and their setting

procedures, see page 99.

In steps 1 and 2, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen

(p.62).

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Select the desired function and press

<0>. The function’s setting screen

will appear.

T urn the <6> or <5> dial or press

the <Y> <Z> keys to change the

settings. There are also some

functions that are set by pressing the

, , or <L> button.

Press <0> to finalize the setting and

return to the Quick Control screen.

When you select <r> (p.114) and

press the <M> button, the

previous screen will reappear.

Sample Quick Con t rol Screen

Function Settin g Screen

Shutter speed (p.160)

AF operation (p.110)

White balance correction (p.144)

Shooting mode

(p.31)

Highlight tone priority* (p.353)

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.146)

Drive mode (p.122)

Picture Style (p.135)

Exposure

compensation/

AEB setting

(p.169/170)

ISO speed (p.132)

Image-recording quality (p.126)

Aperture (p.162)

Flash exposure

compensation (p.178)

Metering mode (p.167)

Built-in flash settings

(p.186)

White balance bracketing (p.145)

AF area selection mode (p.115)

White balance (p.142)

Return

Functions marked with an asterisk cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.

<0>

You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-

recording quality, date and time, etc.

3 Menu Operations

Tab

Menu items

zShooting

LCD monitor

5Set-up

9My Menu

<0> button

3Playback

The menu tabs and items displayed will differ depending on the

shooting mode.

Menu Screen

Creative Zone modes

<M> button

ALive View shooting

Basic Zone modes Movie shooting

Quick Control Dial

settings

3 Menu Operations

1Display the menu screen.

Press the <M> button to display

the menu screen.

2Select a tab.

Press the Quick Control Dial’s <Y>

<Z> keys to select a tab (group of

functions).

For example, in this manual, “the

[z3] tab” refers to the screen

displayed when the third z

(Shooting) tab from the left [t] is

selected.

3Select the desired item.

Press the Quick Control Dial’s <W>

<X> keys to select the item, then

press <0>.

4Select the setting.

Press the Quick Control Dial’s <W>

<X> or <Y> <Z> keys to select the

desired setting. (Some settings

require you to press either the <W>

<X> or <Y> <Z> keys to select

those settings.)

The current setting is indicated in

blue.

5Set the desired setting.

Press <0> to set it.

6Exit the setting.

Press the <M> button to return to

the shooting function settings display.

Menu Setting Procedure

3 Menu Operations

Example: When [Multi Shot

Noise Reduction] is set Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The

menu item is dimmed if another function

setting is overriding it.

You can see the overriding function by

selecting the dimmed menu item and

pressing <0>.

If you cancel the overriding function’s

setting, the dimmed menu item will

become settable.

Dimmed Menu Items

In step 2, you can al so turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab. In step

4, you can also turn the <5> di al to select cert ain settings.

In steps 2 to 5, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen (p.62).

The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have

pressed the <M> butt on to display the menu screen.

To cancel, press the <M> button.

For details about each menu item, see pa ge 378.

Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.

With [Clear all c amera settings] u nder [54: Clear sett ings], you can reset

the menu functions to the default settings (p.282).

The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can operate with

your fingers.

Quick Control (Sample display)

Use your finger to tap on (touch

briefly and then remove your finger

from) the LCD monitor.

By tapping, you can select menus,

icons, etc., displayed on the LCD

monitor.

When touch-screen operation is

possible, a frame will appear around

the icon (except on menu screens).

For example, when you tap on [Q],

the Quick Control screen appears. By

tapping on [2], you can return to the

preceding screen.

Operations possible by tapping on the screen

Setting menu functions after pressing the <M> button

Quick Control

Setting functions after pressing the , <g>, <S>, <WB>,

<XA>, <YQi>, or <Zf> button

Touch shutter during Live View shooting

Setting functions during Live View shooting

Setting functions during movie shooting

Playback operations

d Using the Touch Screen

Tap

d Using the Touch Screen

Menu screen (Sample display)

Slide your finger while touching the

LCD monitor.

Scale display (Sample display)

Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen

Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button

Setting a scale control

Quick Control

Setting functions during Live View shooting

Setting functions during movie shooting

Playback operations

If [z1: Beep] is set to [Touch to y],

the beep will not sound during touch

operations.

Drag

3 Silencing the Beep during Touch Operations

d Using the Touch Screen

1Select [Touch control].

Under the [53] tab, select [Touch

control], then press <0>.

2Set the touch control setting.

Select the preferred setting, then

press <0>.

[Standard] is the normal setting.

[Sensitive] provides a more reactive

touch response than [Standard]. Try

using both settings and select the one

you prefer.

To disable touch-screen operations,

select [Disable].

3 Touch Contro l Settings

Cautions for Touch Screen Operations

Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp

objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.

Do not use wet fingers for touch screen operations.

If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your finge rs are wet, the touch

screen may not respond or misopera tion may occur. In such a case, turn

off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth.

Do not atta ch any prot ecti ve sh eet (c ommercially available) or sticker on

the LCD monitor. It may make the touch operation response slow.

If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch

response may be slower.

If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or

computer, format the card with this camera.

When the ca rd is formatted, al l images and dat a on the card will

be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure

there is nothing you need to keep. If necess ary, transfer the

images and data to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.

1Select [Format card].

Under the [51] tab, select [Format

card], then press <0>.

2Format the card.

Select [OK], then press <0>.

The card will be formatted.

When the formatting is completed,

the menu will reappear.

For low-level formatting, press the

<L> button to append [Low level

format] with a checkmark <X>, then

select [OK].

3 Formatting the Card

The card is new.

The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.

The card is full with images or data.

A card-related error is displayed (p.399).

Execute [Format card] in the following cases:

Low-level Formatting

Perform low-level formatti ng if the card’s recordi ng or reading speed seems

slow or if you wa nt to totally erase da ta on th e ca r d.

Since low-level formatt ing will format all recordable sectors on the card, the

formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.

You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this

case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as

usual.

When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management

information is changed. The actu al data is not completely erased. Be

aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the

card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physica lly to

prevent the personal data from being leaked.

Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software on the card must be

installed on your computer. Then format the card with the camera.

The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller

than the capacity indicated on the card.

This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen, menu

screen, captured images, etc.

When you turn on the power, the

shooting settings will be displayed.

When your eye is near the viewfinder

eyepiece, the display-off sensor

(p.27, 285) will turn off the LCD

monitor to prevent glare. When your

eye leaves the viewfinder eyepiece,

the LCD monitor will turn on again.

By pressing the button, you

can switch the LCD monitor screen

as follows: Display the camera

settings screen, display the electronic

level, display the shooting settings

screen, or turn off the LCD monitor

screen (p.362).

Switching the LCD Monitor Display

Shooting Settings

Appears when you press the

<M> button. Press the

button again to return to the

shooting settings screen.

Appears when you press the

<x> button. Press the button

again to return to the shooting

settings screen.

Menu Functions Captured Image

Switching the LCD Monitor Display

Under [52: LCD auto off], you can prevent the LCD monitor from

turning of f automatically (p.285).

Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed, pressing

the shutter button wil l enable you to shoot immediately.

If you look through the viewfinder eyepie ce while wearing sunglasses,

the LCD monitor may not turn of f automatically. If this occurs, press the

button to turn off the LCD monitor.

Nearby fluorescent light ing may cause t he LCD monitor to tur n of f . If this

occurs, take the camera away from the flu orescent lighting.

You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt

or compose the shot.

1Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [52] tab, select

[Viewfinder display], then press

<0>.

2Select [Grid display].

Select [Grid display], then press

<0>.

3Select [Show].

Select [Show], then press <0>.

When you exit the menu, the grid will

appear in the viewfinder.

lDisplaying the Grid

You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and

before you start shooting a movie (p.214, 265).

You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the

viewfinder to help you correct the ca mera tilt. Note that you can check

only the horizontal tilt and not the forward/backward tilt.

1Press the button.



Each time you press the <

button, the screen display will change.

Display the electronic level.



If the electronic level does not appear ,

set [

53: z button display

options

] so that the electronic level

can be displayed (

p.362

2Check the camera’s tilt.

The horizontal tilt is displayed in 1°

increments. The tilt scale is marked in

5° increments.

When the red line turns green, it

indicates that the tilt is almost

corrected.

Q Displaying the Electronic Level

Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor

Horizontal level



Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.



If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be larger .

During Live V i ew shooting and before movie shooting (except with u+

T r acking), you can also display the electronic level as described above

(p.205, 240).

Q Displaying the Electronic Level

A simple electronic level using a camera icon can be disp layed in the

viewfinder . Since this can be displayed while you shoot, you can correct

any tilt during handheld shooting.

1Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [52] tab, select

[Viewfinder display], then press

<0>.

2Select [Ele ctronic level].

Select [Electronic level], then press

<0>.

3Select [Show].

Select [Show], then press <0>.

4Press the shutter button halfway.

The electronic level will appear as

shown in the illustration.

This also works with vertical shooting.

3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder

Electronic level

Horizontal

Tilt 1°

Tilt 2° or higher

Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of ±1°.

If you set this function, <G> will appear in the viewfinder when

the camera detects flicker caused by the blinking of the light source. By

default, flicker detection is set to [Show].

1Select [Viewfinder di splay].

Under the [52] tab, select

[Viewfinder display], then press

<0>.

2Select [Flicker d etection].

Select [Flicker detection], then

press <0>.

3Select [Show].

Select [Show], then press <0>.

Displaying the Flicker DetectionK

If you set [z3: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable], you can shoot with

reduced unevenness of exposure caused by the flicker (p.154).

The Feature guide appears when you change the shooting mode or set

a shooting function, Live View shooting, movie shooting, or Quick

Control for playback, and displays a brief description of that mode,

function or option. It also displays a description when you select a

function or option on the Quick Control screen. The Feature guide turns

off when you tap on the description or proceed with the operation.

Shooting mode (Sample)

Quick Control (Sample)

Select [Feature guide].

Under the [53] tab, select [Feature

guide], then press <0>.

Select [Disable], then press <0>.

Feature Guide

3 Disabling the Feature Guide

Shooting settings Live View shooting Playback

Basic Shooting and

Image Playback

This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes

on the Mode Dial for best results and how to play back

images.

With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot while the

camera sets everything automatically (p.99, 370). Also, to

prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations,

advanced shooting function settings cannot be changed.

If you set the Mode Dial to <8> when the LCD monitor is off,

press the <Q> button to check the sho oting mo de before sho oting

(p.90).

<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene

and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus

automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.79).

1Set the Mode Dial to <A>.

Turn the Mode Dial while holding

down the lock release button at the

center.

2Aim the Area AF frame over the

subject.

All the AF points will be used to focus,

and the camera will focus on the

closest object.

Aiming the center of the Area AF

frame over the subject will make

focusing easier.

3Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway. The

lens focusing ring will rotate to focus.

The AF point(s) that achieve(s) focus

will be displayed. At the same time,

the beeper will sound and the focus

indicator <o> in the viewfinder will

light up.

In low light, the AF point(s) will light

up briefly in red.

If necessary, the built-in flash will be

raised automatically.

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Area AF frame

Focus indicator

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

4Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

The captured image will be displayed

for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.

After you finish shooting, push down

the built-in flash with your fingers.

The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.

Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press

the shutter button halfway (p.52). If you are too close to the subject,

move away and try again.

When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.

The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low-light

conditions.

Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.

Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the

picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting

up.

FAQ

The <A> mode makes the colors loo k more impressive in natur e, outdo or,

and sunset scenes. If you did not obt ain the desired col or tones, change the

mode to a Creative Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than

<D>, then shoot again (p.135).

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator <o>

does not light up.)

It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving

subject. (The focus indicator <o> does not light up.) You can take

sharp pictures of a moving subject.

Note that the focus lock (p.79) will not work in this case.

Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the

subject.

If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),

set it to <AF> (autofocus).

The flash fired even though it was daylight.

For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s

dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, use the Quick Control

to set [Flash firing] to [b] (p.98) or set the <7> (Flash Off) mode

and shoot (p.81).

The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright.

Move further from the subject and shoot. When shooting flash

photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture

may come out extremely bright (overexposure).

In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.

Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to

fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called the AF-

assist beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet. The

built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is

normal and not a malfunction.

When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out

unnaturally dark.

The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because

the subject was too close to the camera. Move further away from the

subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before

taking the flash picture.

Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to

create a balanced background and good perspective.

In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a

still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot

while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the

shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.

Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes (except <5>

<C>).

In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)

while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the

subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long

as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while

pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous.

When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Recomposin g the Shot

Shooting a Moving Subject

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is

called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 201.

1Display the Live View image on

the LCD monitor.

Press the <A> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

2Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway to

focus.

When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

3Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely.

The picture is taken and the captured

image is displayed on the LCD

monitor.

When the playback display ends, the

camera will return to Live View

shooting automatically.

Press the <A> button to end the

Live View shooting.

You can also rotate the LCD monitor for different angles (p.41).

A Live View Shooting

Normal angle Low angle High angle

The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings

automatically. In places where flash photography is prohibited such as

in a museum or an aquarium, use the <7> (Flash Off) mode.

Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder

blinks.

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the

viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady

or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to

reduce blur caused by camera shake even while handholding the

camera.

Take portraits without flash.

In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is

taken. Any movement by the subject during shooting may result in

the subject being blurred in the picture.

7 Disabling Flash

Shooting Tips

In the <C> mode, you can set the following functions for shooting:

(1) Extra Effect Shot, (2) Ambience-based shots, (3) Background blur,

(4) Drive mode, and (5) Flash firing. The default settings are the same

as the <A> mode.

* CA stands for Creative Auto.

1Set the Mode Dial to <C>.

2Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

3Set the desired function.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to select a function.

The selected function and Feature

guide (p.73) will appear.

Press <0> to set the function.

For the setting procedure and details

on each function, see pages 83-85.

4Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

C Creative Auto Shooting

If you set (1), (2) or (3) when the camera is set for Live View shooting,

you can see the effect on the screen before you start shooting.

(1) Ext ra Effect Shot

• Y ou can select any of the following effects for shooting: Creative filters

(p.210), Picture Styles (p.135), and Ambience-based shots (p.100).

• Turn the <5> dial to select [ : Enable]. T urn the <6> dial to

select a shooting effect and shoot.

• When you take a picture, two images will be recorded. One with

the effect applied and one without. Both images will be displayed

together immediately after you take the picture. The image without

the effect is displayed on the lef t and the one with the effect on the

right.

Registering your favorite shooting effects

• During the image review immediately after shooting and during

playback, the image applied with the effect will have the [s]

icon. After you press the <0> button and then the button,

you can check which shooting effect is applied.

• You can register up to two shooting effects under [

9:Favorite effect

• When you select the registered [9:Favorite effect], you can

shoot with that shooting effect applied. You can also overwrite the

[9:Favorite effect].

(2)

(3)

(5)

ISO speed (4)

(1)

Shutter speed

If you are using a n Eye-Fi card and ha ve set it to erase images af ter t heir

transfer, the image without the effect will not be displayed during the

playback immediately after shooting.

The Live View image displa yed with Extra Effect Shot applied will not

look exactl y th e sa m e as t h e ac tu a l p ho t o.

Aperture

C Creative Auto Shooting

(2) Ambience-based shots

• You can select and shoot with the ambience you want to convey in

your images.

• Turn the <5> dial to select the ambience. For details, see page

100.

(3) Background blur

• If [OFF] is set, the degree of background blur will change

depending on the brightness.

• If it is set to any setting other than [OFF], you can adjust the

background blur regardless of the brightness.

• If you turn the <6> or <5> dial to move the cursor to the right,

the background will look sharper.

• Turning the <6> or <5> dial to move the cursor to the left will

blur the subject’s background. Note that depending on the lens’s

maximum aperture (smallest f/number), certain slider adjustments

may not be selectable.

• If you use Live View shooting, you can see how the image is

blurred in front of and behind the point of focus. When you turn the

<6> or <5> dial, [Simulating blur] will be displayed on the

LCD monitor.

• If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting Portraits” on

page 86.

• Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background

may not look so blurred.

• This function cannot be set if you use flash. If <a> has been set

and you set background blur, will be set automatically.

If [Simulating blur] is effective during Live View shooting, the image

displayed with <g> (p.204) blinking may have more noise than the

actual image being recorded, or it may look dark.

You cannot set both (1) Extra Effect Shot and (2) Ambience-based shot s

at the same time.

You cannot set both (1) Extra Effect Shot and (3) Background blur at the

same time.

C Creative Auto Shooting

(4) Drive mod e: Use the <6> or <5> dial to make the selection.

Single shooting:

Shoot one image at a time.

Continuous shooting:

While you hold down the shutter button completely,

shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to

approx. 5.0 shots per second.

Silent single shooting*:

Single shooting with less shooting sound than .

<M>Silent continuous shooting*:

Continuous shooting (max. approx. 3.0 shots per

second) with less shooting sound than <

<Q>Self-timer: 10sec./remote control:

The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the

shutter button. A remote controller can also be used.

<l>Self-timer: 2 sec.:

The picture is taken 2 seconds after you press the

shutter button.

<q>Self-timer: Continuous:

Press the <W> <X> keys to set the number of

multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer.

10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set

number of multiple shots will be taken.

* Cannot be set during Live View shooting.

(5) Flash firing: Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the desired

setting.

<a>Auto flash : The flash fires automatically when necessary.

Flash on : The flash fires at all times.

Flash off : The flash is disabled.

When using the self-timer, see the notes on page 124.

When using , see “Disabling Flash” on page 81.

If you have set Extra Effect Shot, 1+73, 1, and <M>

<q> cannot be set.

If you have set background blur, you cannot use flash.

The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human

subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.

Select the location where the distance between the subject and

the background is the farthest.

The further the distance between the subject and background, the

more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand

out better against an uncluttered dark background.

Use a telephoto lens.

If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with

the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.

Focus on the face.

Check that the AF point covering the face lights up. For close-ups of

the face, focus on the eyes.

2 Shooting Portraits

Shooting Tips

The default setting is (Continuous shooting). I f you hold down the

shutter button, you can shoot continuously to capture subtle changes in the

subject’s pose and facial expression (max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.).

Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have

everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and

very sharp and crisp images.

With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.

When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far

will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth

to landscapes.

Shooting night scenes.

The <3> mode is also good for night scenes because it disables

the built-in flash. When shooting night scenes, use a tripod to

prevent camera shake.

3 Shooting Landscapes

Shooting Tips

The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-lig ht conditions.

If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4>

(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a

macro lens (sold separately).

Use a simple background.

A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out

better.

Move in as close as possible to the subject.

Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses

have indications such as <MACRO 0.25m/0.8ft> on them. The lens

minimum focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal

plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too

close to the subject, the focus indicator <o> will blink.

If you use flash and the bottom of the picture look s unusually dark,

move away from the subject.

With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.

If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the

subject look larger.

4 Shooting Close-ups

Shooting Tips

Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a

running person or a moving vehicle.

Use a telephoto lens.

The use of a telephoto lens is recommended for shooting from a

distance.

Track the subject with the Area AF frame.

Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter

button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF frame. During

autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly . If focus cannot

be achieved, the focus indicator <o> will blink.

The default setting is (Continuous shooting). When you want

to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold

down the shutter button, you will be able to maintain autofocusing

during continuous shooting of the subject’s movement (max. approx.

5.0 shots per sec.).

5 Shooting Moving Subjects

Shooting Tips

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s

shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera

steady and shoot.

If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when

you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.

1Set the Mode Dial to <8>.

2Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

3Select a shooting mode.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to select the desired shooting

mode’s icon.

T urn the <6> or <5> dial to select

a shooting mode.

You can also select the shooting

mode icon and press <0> to display

a selection of shooting modes from

which you can select one.

Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode

8: Special Scene Mode

Shooting Mode Page Shooting Mode Page

CKids p.91 6Night Portrait p.94

PFood p.92 FHandheld Night Scene p.95

xCandlelight p.93 GHDR Backlight Control p.96

When you want to continuously focus and shoot children running

around, use <C> (Kids). Skin tones will look healthy.

Track the subject with the Area AF frame.

Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter

button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF frame. During

autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly . If focus cannot

be achieved, the focus indicator <o> will blink.

Shoot continuously.

The default setting is (Continuous shooting). When you want

to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold

down the shutter button, you will be able to maintain autofocusing

during continuous shooting of the subject’s changing facial

expressions and movement (max. approx. 5.0 shots per sec.).

C Shooting Children

Shooting Tips

While the flash is recycling, “buSY” is displayed in th e viewfinder an d on the

LCD panel, and a picture cannot be t aken. Take the picture af ter this display

turns off. During Live View shooting, “BUSY” is displayed on the LCD

monitor, and you cannot view the subject.

When shooting food, use (Food). The photo will look bright and

vivid.

Change the color tone.

You can change [Color tone]. Food photos with a reddish tinge

usually make the food look more vivid. To increase the food’s

reddish tinge, set it toward [Warm tone]. Set it toward [Cool tone] if

it looks too red.

Shoot the subject in close-up.

If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to shoot the food in

close-up.

Avoid using flash.

If you use flash, the light may reflect off the dish or food and results

in unnatural shadows. By default, (Flash off) is set. Try to

prevent camera shake when shooting in low-light conditions.

P Shooting Food

Shooting Tips

Since this mode sets the color tone to make food look vivid, human

subjects may be shot in an unsuit able skin tone.

If you use flash, the [Color tone] setting will switch to the standard

setting.

When shooting a human subject in candlelight, use <x> (Candlelight).

The candlelight color tones will be retained in the photo.

Use the center AF point to focus.

Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder over the subject, then shoot.

Prevent camera shake if the shutter speed in the viewfinder

blinks.

Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the

viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady

or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to

reduce blur caused by camera shake even while handholding the

camera.

Change the color tone.

You can change [Color tone]. To increase the candlelight’s reddish

tinge, set it toward [Warm tone]. Set it toward [Cool tone] if it looks

too red.

x Shooting Candlelight Portraits

Shooting Tips

Live V iew shooting cannot be used.

The built-in flash will not fire. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be

emitted (p.113).

If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

To shoot people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the

background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Using a tripod is

recommended.

Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide

night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

Check the subject’s brightness.

Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a

good exposure of the subject.

It is recommended to play back the image after shooting to check

the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and

shoot again.

Also shoot in other shooting modes.

Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also

with <A> and <F> is recommended.

Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)

Shooting Tips

Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.

If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light

up briefly after th e p ic tu r e i s taken.

See the cautions on page 97.

Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results.

However , the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot

night scenes even while handholding the camera. Four shots are taken

continuously for each picture, and the resulting one image with reduced

camera shake is recorded.

Hold the camera firmly.

While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,

four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if

there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to

camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.

For shots of people, turn on the flash.

If you want to include people in the night scene shot, press the <Q>

button to set <D> (Flash on). To take a nice portrait, the first shot will

use flash. Tell the subject not to move until all four continuous shots

are taken.

F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 97.

When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas, use the

<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this

mode, three continuous shots are taken at different exposures. This

results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the

clipped shadows caused by backlighting.

Hold the camera firmly.

While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,

three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if

there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to

camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.

G Shooting Backlit Scenes

Shooting Tips

The flash will not fire. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be emitted

(p.113).

See the cautions on page 97.

HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

Cautions for both <6> (Night Portrait) and <F> (Handheld Night

Scene)

During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus on dots of light

such as in a night scene. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode

switch to <MF> and focus manually.

The Live View image displayed will not look exactly the same as the

actual image shot.

Cautions for <F> (Handheld Night Scene)

When shooting flash photography, if the subject is too close to the

camera, the picture may come out extremely brig ht (overexposure).

If you use flash to shoot a night scen e with f ew lights, the shots may not

align correctly. This can result in a blurry picture.



If you use flash and the human subject is close to the background that is also

illuminat ed by the flas h, the shot s may no t align corre ctly. This can result in a

blurry picture. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may also appear.

External flash coverage:

• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom

position wil l be f ixed to t he wid e e nd, r egar dless of the l ens’s zoom position.

• If you have to set the flash coverage manually, set the light-emitting

unit (flash head) to the wide-angle end before shooting.

Cautions for <6> (Night Portrait)

During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus when the face of

the subject looks dark. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <MF> and focus manually.

Cautions for both <F> (Handheld Night Scene) and <G> (HDR

Backlight Control)

Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.

1+73 or 1 cannot be selected. If 1+73 or 1 has been set,

73 will be set.

If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave

afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.

The image alignment may not funct i on properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly

misaligned due to camera shake.

It take s some time to record images to the card since they are merged

after shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be

displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take

another picture until the processing is completed.



If the shooting mode is set to <

> or <

>, direct printing is not possible.

Q Quick Control

In Basic Zone modes when the shooting function settings screen is

displayed, you can press the <Q> button to display the Quick Control

screen. The tables on the next page show the functions that can be set

with the Quick Control screen in each Basic Zone mode.

1Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone

mode.

2Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

3Set the functions.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to select a function. (This step is

not necessary in the 7 mode.)

The selected function and Feature

guide (p.73) will appear.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to

change the setting.

You can also select from a list by

selecting a function and pressing

<0>.

Cautions for <G> (HDR Backlight Control)

Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and

may look irregular or have significant noise.

HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit

scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.



When shooting subjects that are sufficiently bright, for example for normally

lit scenes, the image may look unnatural because of the applied HDR effect.

Q Quick Control

Example: Portrait mode

Q Quick Control

Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes

o: Default setting k: User selectable : Not selectable

* If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the

functions will revert to the default settings (except the self-timer).

Function A 7 C2 3 4 5

Drive mode

(p.122)

u: Single shooting o o o k o o k

i: Continuous shooting k k k o k k o

B: Silent single shooting kkkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting

kkkkkkk

Q (10 sec.) kkkkkkk

l (2 sec.) kkkkkkk

q (Continuous) kkkkkkk

Flash firing

a: Automatic firing o o o o

Flash on (Fires at all times)

k k k k

b: Flash off k o k k o k o

Ambience-based shots (p.100) kkkkk

Light/scene-based shots (p.104) k k k k

Background blur (p.84) k

Color tone (p.92, 93)

Extra Effect Shot (p.83) k

Function 8

C P x6FG

Drive mode

(p.122)

u: Single shooting kooooo

i: Continuous shooting okkkkk

B: Silent single shooting kkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting

kkkkkk

Q (10 sec.) kkkkkk

l (2 sec.) kkkkkk

q (Continuous) kkkkkk

Flash firing

a: Automatic firing o o

Flash on (Fires at all times)

k k k

b: Flash off k o o o o

Ambience-based shots (p.100) kkkkk

Light/scene-based shots (p.104) k

Background blur (p.84)

Color tone (p.92, 93) k k

Extra Effect Shot (p.83)

100

Except in the <A>, <7>, and <G> Basic Zone modes, you can

select the ambience for shooting.

1Set the Mode Dial to any of the

following modes: <C>, <2>,

<3>, <4>, <5>, or <8>.

If the shooting mode is <8>, set

one of the following: <C>, ,

<x>, <6>, or <F>.

2Display the Live View image.

Press the <A> button to display the

Live View image (except <x>).

3On the Quick Control screen,

select the desired ambience.

Press the <Q> button (7).

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[m Standard setting]. [Ambience-

based shots] will appear on the

screen.

Shoot by Ambience Selection

Ambience C/2/3/4/

8Ambience Effect

C/6/F P/x

m Standard setting kkk

No setting

n Vivid kk Low / Standard / Strong

o Soft kk Low / Standard / Strong

p Warm kk Low / Standard / Strong

t Intense kk Low / Standard / Strong

u Cool kk Low / Standard / Strong

v Brighter kkk

Low / Medium / High

x Darker kkk

Low / Medium / High

y Monochrome kkk

Blue / B/W / Sepia

101

Shoot by Ambience Selection

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the desired ambience.

The LCD monitor will display how the

image will look with the selected

ambience.

4Set the ambience effect.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the effect so that [Effect] appears at

the bottom.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the desired effect.

5Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

To return to viewfinder shooting,

press the <A> button to exit Live

View shooting. Then press the shutter

button completely to take the picture.

If you change the shooting mode or

set the power switch to <2>, the

setting will revert back to [m

Standard setting].

The Live Vie w image disp layed with t he ambience setti ng applied will not

look exactly the same as the actual image.

Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.

In bright out doors, the Live View image you see on the LCD monitor may

not have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the act ual image.

Set [52: LCD brightness] to 4, and look at the Live View image so that

the LCD monitor is unaffected by outsid e light.

If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting

functions, press the <Q> butt on after step 1 and set [Ambience-based

shots] and [Effect].

Shoot by Ambience Selection

102

Ambience Settings

mStandard setting

Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.

Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and

<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of

the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.

nVivid

The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more

impressive than with [m Standard setting].

oSoft

The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets,

flowers, etc.

pWarm

The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,

pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.

tIntense

While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is

emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living

subject stand out more.

uCool

The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A

subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.

103

Shoot by Ambience Selection

vBrighter

The picture will look brighter.

xDarker

The picture will look darker.

yMonochrome

The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome

color to be blue, black and white, or sepia. When [Monochrome] is

selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.

104

In the <2>, <3>, <4>, <5>, and <C> Basic Zone modes, you can

shoot with the settings matching the lighting or scene type. Normally,

[e Default setting] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting

condition or scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eyes.

For Live View shooting, if you set both [Light/scene-based shots] and

[Ambience-based shots] (p.100), you should first set [Light/scene-

based shots]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the

LCD monitor.

1Set the Mode Dial to any of the

following modes: <2>, <3>,

<4>, <5>, or <8>.

For <8>, set it to <C>.

2Display the Live View image.

Press the <A> button to display the

Live View image.

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type

Lighting or Scene 2 3 4 5 8

e Default setting k k k k k

f Daylight k k k k k

g Shade k k k k k

h Cloudy k k k k k

i Tungsten light k k k k

j Fluorescent light k k k k

r Sunset k k k k k

105

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type

3On the Quick Control screen,

select the lighting or scene type.

Press the <Q> button (7).

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[e Default setting]. [Light/scene-

based shots] will appear on the

screen.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the lighting or scene type.

The resulting image with the selected

lighting or scene type will be

displayed.

4Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

To return to viewfinder shooting,

press the <A> button to exit Live

View shooting. Then press the shutter

button completely to take the picture.

If you change the shooting mode or

set the power switch to <2>, the

setting will revert back to [e Default

setting].



If you use flash, the setting will switch to

[e Default setting]

. (However,

the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that is set.)

If you want to set this together with [Ambi ence-based shots], set the

lighting or scene type that best ma tches the ambience you have set. In

the case of [Sunset], for exampl e, warm colors will become prominent so

the ambience you set may not work well.

If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting

functions, press the <Q> butt on after step 1 and set [Light/scene-based

shots].

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type

106

Lighting or Scene Type Settings

e Default setting

Default setting suited for most subjects.

f Daylight

For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies

and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.

g Shade

For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look

too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.

h Cloudy

For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and

landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look

warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.

i Tungsten light

For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange

color cast caused by tungsten lighting.

j Fluorescent light

For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of

fluorescent lighting.

r Sunset

Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.

107

The easiest way to play back images is explained below. For more

details on the playback procedure, see page 291.

1Play back the image.

Press the <x> button.

The last image captured or played

back will appear.

2Select an image.

To play back images starting with the

last image captured, turn the <5>

dial counterclockwise. To play back

images starting with the first captured

image, turn the <5> dial clockwise.

Each time you press the

button, the information display will

change.

x Image Playback

No information Basic information

display

Shooting information display

x Image Playback

108

3Exit the image playback.

Press the <x> button to exit the

image playback and return to

shooting-ready state.

With the shooting information screen displayed (p.107), you can press

the <W> <X> keys to change the shooting information displayed at the

screen’s bottom as follows. For details, see pages 321-322.

Shooting Information Display

Detailed information

GPS information

Lens aberration correction information

Color space / Noise reduction information

Lens / Histogram information

White balance information

Picture Style information

The information displayed vari es depending on the shooting mode and

settings.

If GPS information is not recorded for the image, the GPS information

screen will not be displayed.

109

Setting the AF and

Drive Modes

The 19 AF points in the viewfinder

make AF shooting suitable for a

wide variety of subjects and

scenes.

You can also select the AF operation and drive mode

that best match the shooting conditions and subject.

The J icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes

(p.31).

In Basic Zone modes, the AF operation and AF point (AF

area selection mode) are set automatically.

<AF> stands fo r autofocus. <MF> st ands for manual focus.

110

You can select the AF (autofocus) operation characteristics suiting the

shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF

operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.

1Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <AF>.

2Press the <Zf> button.

[AF operation] will appear.

3Select the AF operation.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the desired AF operation, then press

<0>.

4Focus on the subject.

Aim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway. The

camera will then autofocus in the

selected AF operation.

f: Changing the Autofocus OperationK

111

f: Changing the Autofocus OperationK

Suited for still subjects. When you

press the shutter button halfway, the

camera will focus only once.

When focus is achieved, the AF point

that achieved focus will be displayed,

and the focus indicator <o> in the

viewfinder will also light up.

With evaluative metering, the

exposure setting will be set at the

same time focus is achieved.

While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be

locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

Focus indicator

AF point

If focus cannot be ac hi e v ed, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder

will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter

button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot or see “Subjects

Difficult to Focus on” (p.120) and try to focus again.

If [z1: Beep ] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus

is achieved.

After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a

subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is

convenient when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered

by the Area AF frame.

When a lens equipped with electronic manual focusing function is used,

after achieving focus, you can focus manually by turning the lens

focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway.

f: Changing the Autofocus OperationK

112

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing

distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button

halfway, the subject will be focused on continuously.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

When the AF area selection mode is set to 19-point automatic

selection AF (p.1 14), the camera first uses the manually-selected AF

point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject moves away from

the manually-selected AF point, focus tracking continues as long as

the subject is covered by the Area AF frame.

AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI

Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.

After the subject is focused on in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts

moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF

operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving

subject.

AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects

AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically

With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.

Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.

When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,

the beeper will contin ue beeping softly. However , the focus indicator <o> in

the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not b e locked in this case.

113

f: Changing the Autofocus OperationK

By default, the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low-

light conditions. In Creative Zone modes, you can set whether to have

the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved (p.356).

Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,

the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. This illuminates the

subject to help autofocusing.

AF Points Lighting Up in Red

AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted from the built-in flash in the

following shooting modes: <7>, <3>, <5>, and <C>.

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.

The built-in flash makes a sound when firing co ntinuously. This is normal

and not a malfunction.

The effecti ve range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is

approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.

In Creative Zone modes, when you raise the built-in flash with the

button (p.176) , the AF-assist beam will be emitte d when necessary. Note

that depending on the setting for [4: AF-assist beam firing] under [54:

Custom Functions (C.Fn)], AF-assist beam will not be emitted (p.354).

114

19 AF points are provided for autofocusing. You can select the AF area

selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.

You can select one of three AF area selection modes. See the next

page for the selection procedure.

h: Single-point AF (Manual

selection)

Select one AF point to focus.

q: Zone AF (Manu al selection of

zone)

The 19 AF points are divided into five

zones for focusing.

r: 19-point automatic selection

All the AF points are used to focus. This

mode is set automatically in Basic

Zone modes (except <x>).

S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointK

AF Area Selection Mode

Area AF frame

115

S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointK

1Press the <S> or button

(9).

Look through the viewfinder and

press the <S> or button.

2Press the button.

Each time you press the

button, the AF area selection mode

changes.

The AF area selection mode currently

set is indicated on the top of the

viewfinder.

h: Single-point AF

(Manual selection)

q:Zone AF

(Manual selection of zone)

r: 19-point automatic selection

Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode

AF area selection mo de

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if you set [5: AF area se le ction

method] to [1: j9Main Dial], you can select the AF area selection mode

by pressing the <S> or button, then turning the <6> dial (p.354).

S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointK

116

You can manually select the AF point or zone. If 19-point automatic

selection AF + AI Servo AF has been set, you can select any position

where AI Servo AF is to start.

1Press the <S> or button

(9).

The AF points will be displayed in the

viewfinder.

In the Zone AF mode, the selected

zone will be displayed.

2Select an AF point.

You can select an AF point by shifting

horizontally with the <6> dial or

vertically with the <5> dial. If you

press <0>, the center AF point (or

center zone) will be selected.

In the Zone AF mode, turning the

<6> or <5> dial will change the

zone in a looping sequence.

You can also select an AF point or

zone by shifting horizontally with the

<Y> <Z> keys or vertically with the

<W> <X> keys.

Selecting the AF Point Manually

<5>

<6>

When you hold down the <Q> button and turn the <6> dial, you can

select an AF point by shifting vertically.

When you press the <S> or button, the LCD panel displays the

following:

• 19-point automatic selection AF and Zone AF (manual selection of

zone): M AF

• 1 pt AF (Manual selection): SEL N (Center)/SEL AF (Off center)

117

Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.

The 19 AF points are divided into five zones for focusing. All the AF

points in the selected zone are used for the automatic selection of the

focusing point(s). It is effective for moving subjects.

However, since it is inclined to focus the nearest subject, focusing a

specific target is harder than with single-point AF.

The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.

AF Area Selection ModesK

h Single -point AF (Ma nual Selec tion)

q Zone AF (Manual Selection of Zone)

AF Area Selection ModesK

118

All the AF points are used to focus. This mode is set automatically in

Basic Zone modes (except <x>).

With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button

halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that

achieved focus. If multiple AF point s are displayed,

it means they all have achieved focus.

With AI Servo AF, the manually-selected (p.1 16) AF

point <S> is used first to achieve focus. The AF

point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.

r 19-point Automatic Selection AF

AF Using Color Tone Detection

Configuring the following makes it easier to focus on still human subject.

• Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF.

• Set the AF area selection mode to Zone AF (manual selection of zone) or

19-point automatic selection AF.

• Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], set [6: Auto AF point selection:

Color Tracking] to [0: One-Shot AF only] (if set to [1: Disable], basically

the nearest subject will be focused on) (p.355).

When AI Servo AF mode is set with 19-point automatic select ion AF or

Zone AF, the active AF point <S> will keep switching to track the

subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the

subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject. Also, in low

temperatures, the tracking response is slower.

If the camera cannot focus with the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite’ s

AF-assist beam, set the AF area selection mode to Singl e-point AF

(manual selection) and select the center AF point to autofocus.

When the AF point(s) light up, p art or al l of the viewf ind er may ligh t up in

red. This is a characteristic of AF point display using liquid crystal.

In low temperatures, it may sometimes become difficult to see the AF

point display because of its characteristics using liquid crystal.

119

AF Area Selection ModesK

Maximum Lens Aperture: f/3.2 - f/5.6

With all AF points, cross-type AF sensitive to both vertical and

horizontal lines is possible. However, with the lenses below, the

peripheral AF points will detect only vertical or horizontal lines (no

cross-type focusing).

Maximum Lens Aperture: f/1.0 - f/2.8

Besides cross-type focusing (vertical and horizontal lines detected

simultaneously), the center AF point can also perform high-precision,

vertical-line sensitive AF.*

The remaining 18 AF points perform cross-type focusing, as with the

maximum aperture at f/3.2 - f/5.6.

* Except with the EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro.

AF Operation and Maximum Lens Apertures

Lenses that Do Not Support Cross-Type Focusing with

Peripheral AF Points

Cross-type focusing at the < > and < > AF points is not possible with the

following lenses:

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6, EF35-8 0mm f/ 4-5.6 II, EF35-80mm f/4-5. 6 III,

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM, EF35-105mm f/ 4.5-5.6, EF35-105mm f/4.5-5. 6

USM, EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II, EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM

Cross-type focusing

Vertical line-sensitive focusing

Horizontal line-sensitive focusing

120

Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus indicator <o>

blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:

Very low-contrast subjects

(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)

Subjects in very low light

Strongly backlit or reflective subjects

(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)

Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point

(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)

Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point

(Example: Night scenes, etc.)

Repetitive patterns

(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)

In such cases, do either of the following:

(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as

the subject and lock the focus before recomposing the shot

(p.79).

(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.

Subjects Difficult to Focus on

Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly

recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.

Conditions that make focusing dif ficult wit h AF dur ing Live View shoot ing

or movie shooting are listed on page 224.

121

Subjects Difficult to Focus on

1Set the lens focus mode switch to

<MF>.

2Focus on the subject.

Focus by turning the lens focusing

ring until the subject looks sharp in

the viewfinder.

MF: Manual Focus

Focusing ring

If you press the shutte r button ha lfway during manua l focusing, th e AF point

that achieved focus and the fo cus indicator <o> will light up in the

viewfinder.

122

Single and continuous drive modes are provided.

1Press the <YQi> button.

[Drive mode] will appear.

2Select the dr ive mode.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the desired drive mode, then press

<0>.

u:Single shooting

When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will

be taken.

i:Continuous shootin g (Max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.)

While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be

taken continuously.

B:Silent single shooting

Single shooting with less shooting sound than .

M:Silent continuous shooting (Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)

Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than .

Q:Self-timer: 10sec./remote control

l:Self-timer: 2 sec.

q:Self-timer: Continuous

For self-timer shooting, see page 124. For remote control

shooting, see page 366.

i Selecting the Drive Mode

123

i Selecting the Drive Mode

If or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter

button completely until the picture is shot will be longer than with normal

single or continuous shooting.

With Live View shooting, and <M> cannot be set.

When the battery level is low, the continuous shooting speed may

become slightly slower.

In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become

slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.

i: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 5.0 shots/sec.

is attaine d under the foll owing condit ions* : At 1/500 sec. o r faster shu tter

speed, at maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), Distortion

correction: Disable, and Anti-flicker shooting: Disable. The continuous

shooting speed may decr ease depending on the shu tter speed, aperture,

subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, remaining

battery level, etc.

* Set the AF operation mode to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer (IS) switch to

OFF when using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-

5.6 IS USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, and EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.

124

1Press the <YQi> button.

[Drive mode] will appear.

2Select the self-timer.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the self-timer, then press <0>.

Q:10-sec. self-timer

The remote controller can also

be used (p.366).

l:2-sec. self-timer (p.85)

10-sec. self-timer plus continuous shots

Press the <

> <

> keys to set

the number of multiple shots (2 to

10) to be taken with the self-timer .

3Take the picture.

Look through the viewfinder , focus on

the subject, then press the shutter

button completely.

You can check the self-timer

operation with the self-timer lamp,

beeper, and countdown display (in

seconds) on the LCD panel.

Two sec. before the picture is taken, the self-timer lamp will light up

and the beeper will sound faster.

j Using the Self-timer

With <q>, the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged

depending on the shooting functions settings such as the image-

recording quality or flash.

If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter

button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.367). If stray light enters the

viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.

After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.107) to check

focus and exposure is recommended.

When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focu s lock (p.79) on an

object at the same distance as where you will stand.

To cancel the self-timer after it start s, either touch the LCD monitor or

press the <YQi> button.

125

Image Settings

This chapter explains imag e-related function settings:

Image-recording quality , ISO speed, Picture S tyle, white

balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, no ise reduction, lens

aberration correction, anti-flicker shooting, and other

functions.

In Basic Zone modes, only the following can be set as

described in this chapter: Image-recording quality and lens

aberration correction.



The

icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (p.31).

126

You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Ten image-

recording quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a,

8a, b, c, 1+73, 1.

1Select the im age-recording

quality.

Under the [z1] tab, select [Image

quality], then press <0>.

[Image quality] will a ppear.

2Set the image-recording quality.

The respective quality’s pixel count

and number of possible shots will be

displayed to help you select the

desired quality. Then press <0>.

Setting the Image-Recording Quality

Pixels recorded (pixel count)

Possible shots

127

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

* The file size, possible shot s, and maximum burst during continuous shoot ing are

based on Canon’ s testing standa rds ( 3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and Standard

Picture Style) using an 8 GB card. These figures will vary by the subject,

card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, and

other settings.

* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible 8 GB card based on

Canon’s testing standards.

Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings (Approx.)

Image Quality Pixels

Recorded

(megapixels)

File Size

(MB) Possible

Shots Maximum

Burst

73 High

quality

JPEG

24 (24M) 7.6 940 180 (940)

83 3.9 1810 1810 (1810)

74 Medium

quality 10.6 (11M) 4.0 1770 1770 (1770)

84 2.0 3500 3500 (3500)

Low

quality

5.9 (5.9 M ) 2.5 2830 2830 (2830)

8a1.3 5320 5320 (5320)

b2.5 (2.5 M ) 1.3 5320 5320 (5320)

c0.35 (0.3M) 0.3 20180 20180 (20180)

1+73 High

quality 24 (24M) 28.1+7.6 190 6 (6)

128.1 240 7 (8)

Even if you use a UHS-I class card, the maximum burst indicator remains

the same. However, the maximum burst in parentheses in the above table

will be applied during continuou s shooting.

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

128

I want to select the image-recording quality matching the paper

size for printing. Refer to the diagram on the left when

choosing the image-recording quality. If

you want to crop the image, selecting a

higher quality (more pixels) such as 73,

83, 1+73, or 1 is recommended.

b is suitable for playing back the image

with a digital photo frame. c is suitable

for emailing the image or using it on a

Web site.

What’s the difference between 7 and 8?

These settings indicate the different levels of image quality caused

by different compression rates. The 7 setting produces a higher

image quality with the same number of pixels. Although 8 produces

a slightly lower image quality, this allows more images to be saved

on the card. Both b and c have 7 (Fine) quality.

I was able to take more shots than the number of possible shots

indicated.

Depending on the shooting conditions, you may be able to take

more shots than is indicated. It may also be fewer than indicated.

The number of possible shots displayed is only approximate.

Does the camera display the maximum burst?

The maximum burst is displayed on the viewfinder’s right side. Since

it is only a single-digit indicator 0 - 9, any number higher than 8 will

be displayed only as “9”. Note that this number will also be displayed

even when no card is installed in the camera. Be careful not to shoot

without a card in the camera.

When should I use 1?

1 images must be processed on a computer. For details, see

“1” and “1+73” on the next page.

FAQ

12.7x8.9cm/5.0x3.5in.

A4(29.7x21cm/11.7x8.3in.)

Paper size

A2(59.4x42cm/23.4x16.5in.)

A3(42x29.7cm/

16.5x11.7in.)

129

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

1 is the raw image data before it is made into 73 or other images.

1 images cannot be viewed on a computer without the use of EOS

software, such as Digital Photo Professional (p.420). However, you can

perform various adjustments on them that are impossible with other

image types such as 73. 1 is effective when you want to precisely

adjust the image yourself or shoot an important subject.

records a

image and a

image with a single shot. The

two images are saved to the card simultaneously. The two images will be

saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension .JPG for

JPEG a nd .C R2 for RA W ).

images can be viewed or printed even with

a computer which does not have the EOS software installed.

1+73

1 image

73 image

File number File extension

0001 . CR2

0001 . JPG

RAW Image Processing Software

The use of “Digital Photo Professional” (EOS software, p.420) is

recommended when viewing RAW images on a computer.



Older versions of Digital Photo Proessional may not be able to process

RAW images taken with this camera. If an older version of Digital Photo

Professional is installed on your co mputer, update (overwrite) it as follows.

• When the software CD-ROM (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk) is provided

with the camera:

Install Digital Photo Professional from the CD-ROM.

• When the software CD-ROM (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk) is not

provided with the camera:

Download a version of Digital Ph oto Professional compatible with this

camera from the Canon Web site.

Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW

images taken with this camera. For compatibility infor mati on, cont a ct the

software manufacturer.

130

You can change the image’s aspect ratio. [3:2] is set by default. When

[4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] is set, lines will appear to indicate the shooting

range. During Live View shooting, the image appears with the

surrounding area masked in black.

1Select the aspect ratio.

Under the [z3] tab, select [Aspect

ratio], then press <0>.

[Aspect ratio] will appear.

2Set the aspect ratio.

Select an aspect ratio, then press

<0>.

JPEG images

The images will be saved with the set aspect ratio.

RAW images

The images will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. The

selected aspect ratio information is added to the RAW image file.

When you process the RAW image with the EOS software, this

allows you to generate an image with the same aspect ratio that was

set for shooting. In the case of the [4:3], [16:9], and [1:1] aspect

ratios, the lines to indicate the aspect ratio will appear during image

playback, but they are not actually drawn on the image.

3Changing the Image’s Aspect RatioK

131

3Changing the Image’s Aspect RatioK

The table below shows the aspect ratio and the number of recorded

pixels for each image-recording quality.

Image

Quality Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (approx.)

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

36000x4000

(24.0 megapi xels)

5328x4000*

(21.3 megapixels)

6000x3368*

(20.2 me gapixels)

4000x4000

(16.0 megapixels)

43984x2656

(10.6 megapi xels)

3552x2664

(9.5 megapixel s)

3984x2240*

(8.9 megapixels)

2656x2656

(7.1 megapi xels)

a2976x1984

(5.9 megapixels)

2656x1992

(5.3 megapixel s)

2976x1680*

(5.0 megapixels)

1984x1984

(3.9 megapi xels)

b1920x1280

(2.5 megapixels)

1696x1280*

(2.2 megapixel s)

1920x1080

(2.1 megapixels)

1280x1280

(1.6 megapi xels)

c720x480

(0.35 megapi xels)

640x480

(0.31 megapixels)

720x408*

(0.29 mega pixels)

480x480

(0.23 megapi xels)

The asterisked image-recording quality settings do not match the

respective aspect rat i o exactly.

The shooting range displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly

larger than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD

monitor when shooting.

If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this

camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.

132

Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the

ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set

automatically (p.134).

1Press the <g> button (9).

2Set the ISO speed.

While looking at the LCD panel or in

the viewfinder, turn the <6> or

<5> dial.

“A” indicates ISO Auto. The ISO

speed will be set automatically

(p.134).

ISO Speed Guide

* High ISO speeds will re sult in grainier images.

Changing the ISO Speed to Suit the Light

ISO Speed Shooting Situation

(No flash) Flash Range

ISO 100 - ISO 400 Sunny outdoors The higher the ISO

speed, the farther the

flash range will extend

(p.176).

ISO 400 - ISO 1600

Overcast skies or evening time

ISO 1600 - ISO 12800, H

Dark indoors or night

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1:

On], “H” (equival ent to ISO 25600) can also be selected (p.352).

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is

set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 and “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be

selected (p.353).

Shooting in high temperat ures may result in images that look grainier.

Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.

133

g: Changing the ISO Speed to Suit the LightK

For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400

- ISO 6400.

Under the [z3] tab, select [ISO Auto],

then press <0>. Select the ISO speed,

then press <0>.

3 Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for [

AUTO

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and

banding) may become noticeable.

If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,

overexposure may result.

When shooting in condi tions that produce an extreme amount of noise,

such as a combination of high ISO speed, high tempe rature and long

exposure, images may not be recorded properly .

As “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) is an expanded ISO speed setting,

noise (such as dots of light and ba nding) and irregular colors will be more

noticeable, and the resolution will be lower than usual.

As the maximum ISO speed that can be set differs between still photo

shooting and movie shooting (manual exposure), the ISO speed you set

may change when you switch from still photo shoot ing to movie shooting.

Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the I SO speed will not

revert to the original setting. The maximum ISO speed that can be set

varies depending on the setting for [2: ISO expansion] under [54:

Custom Functions (C.Fn)].

• When [0: Off] is set: If you set ISO 12800 during still photo shooting

and then switch to movie shooting, ISO speed will be changed to ISO

6400.

• When [1: On] is set: If you set ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO

25600) during still photo shooting and then switch to movie shooting,

ISO speed will be changed to “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800).

g: Changing the ISO Speed to Suit the LightK

134

If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the

actual ISO speed setting will be

displayed when you press the shutter

button halfway. As indicated below, the

ISO speed will be set automatically to

suit the shooting mode.

*1: Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set (p.133).

*2: (1) If fill flash results in overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be

set.

(2) In the C, 2, 3, 4, 5, x, P, and <d> modes, if you use bounce

flash with an external Speedlite, the ISO speed will be automatically set

within ISO 400 - ISO 1600 (or up to the maximum limit).

ISO [

AUTO

]

Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting

No Flash With Flash

A/7/C/2/4/5ISO 100 - ISO 6400

ISO 400*2

(Except in the A, C,

6, and F modes.)

3ISO 100 - ISO 1600

8C/P/x/6/GISO 100 - ISO 6400

FISO 100 - ISO 12800

d/s/f/aISO 100 - ISO 6400*1

With bulb exposures ISO 400

When [

AUTO

] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-st op increments.

However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer incr ement s. There fore, in th e

image’s shoo ting information (p.320), you may find an ISO speed such as

ISO 125 or ISO 640 displayed as the ISO speed.

135

By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics

matching your photographic expression or the subject.

In Basic Zone modes, [D] (Auto) is set automatically.

1Press the <XA> button.

The Picture S tyle selection screen will

appear.

2Select a Picture Style.

Select a Picture Style, then press

<0>.

The Picture Style will be set.

DAuto

The color tones will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene.

The colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery and

sunsets, and in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.

PStandard

The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose

Picture Style suitable for most scenes.

Selecting a Picture StyleK

Picture Style Characteristics

You can also set the Picture Style with [z2: Picture Style].

If the desired color tone is not obtained with [

Auto

], use another Picture Style.

A Selecting a Picture StyleK

136

QPortrait

For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up

portraits.

By changing the [Color tone] (p.138), you can adjust the skin

tone.

RLandscape

For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.

Effective for impressive landscapes.

SNeutral

This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with

their computer. For natural colors and subdued images with

modest brightness and color saturation.

UFaithful

This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with

their computer . The color of a subject that is captured in sunlight at

a color temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the

subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images with modest

brightness and color saturation.

VMonochrome

Creates black-and-white images.

WUser Def. 1-3

You can register a base style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a

Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.140). Any User

Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same

default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.

Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be turned into color. If

you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the

[Monochrome] setting is canceled. When [Monochrome] is

selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.

137

You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters

such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take

test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 139.

1Press the <XA> button.

The Picture S tyle selection screen will

appear.

2Select a Picture Style.

Select a Picture Style, then press the

button.

3Select a parameter.

Select a parameter such as

[Sharpness], then press <0>.

4Set the parameter.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust

the parameter as desired, then press

<0>.

Press the <M> button to save the

adjusted parameters. The Picture

Style selection screen will reappear.

Any parameter settings different from

the default will be displayed in blue.

A Customizing a Picture StyleK

By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter

settings of the respective Pictu re Style to its default.

To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, follow step 2 on page 135 t o

select the adjusted Picture Style, then shoot.

A Customizing a Picture StyleK

138

g Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of the image.

To make it less sharp, set it toward the E end. The closer it is to E,

the softer the image will look.

To make it sharper, set it toward the F end. The closer it is to F, the

sharper the image will look.

h Contrast

Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors.

To decrease the contrast, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is

to G, the more muted the image will look.

To increase the contrast, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to

H, the crisper the image will look.

i Saturation

Adjusts the color saturation in the image.

To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus end. The

closer it is to G, the more diluted the colors will look.

To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus end. The

closer it is to H, the bolder the colors will look.

j Color tone

Adjusts the color tone of skin.

To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. The

closer it is to G, the redder the skin tone will look.

To reduce skin redness, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to

H, the more yellow the skin tone will look.

Parameter Settings and Effects

139

A Customizing a Picture StyleK

For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [T oning effect] in

addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding

page.

kFilter Effect

With a filter effect applied to a

monochrome image, you can make

white clouds or green trees stand out

more.

lToning Effect

By applying a toning effect, you can

create a monochrome image in that

color. It can make the image look more

impressive.

The following can be selected: [N:None],

[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or

[G:Green].

V Monochrome Adjustment

Filter Sample Effects

N: None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

Ye: Yellow The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will loo k

crisper.

Or: Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more

brilliant.

R: Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and

brighter.

G: Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tre e leaves will look

crisper and bright er.

Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.

140

You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],

adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [U ser Def. 1],

[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].

You can create multiple Picture Styles with different settings for

parameters such as sharpness and contrast.

You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered

to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.420).

1Press the <XA> button.

The Picture S tyle selection screen will

appear.

2Select [User Def. *].

Select [User Def. *], then press

.

The Detail setting screen will appear.

3Press <0>.

With [Picture Style] selected, press

<0>.

4Select the base Picture Style.

Select the base Picture Style, then

press <0>.

To adjust the parameters of a Picture

Style that is registered to the camera

with EOS Utility (EOS software),

select the Picture Style here.

Registering a Picture StyleK

141

A Registering a Picture StyleK

5Select a parameter.

Select a parameter such as

[Sharpness], then press <0>.

6Set the parameter.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust

the parameter as desired, then press

<0>.

For details, see “Customizing a

Picture Style” on pages 137-139.

Press the <M> button to register

the modified Picture Style. The

Picture Style selection screen will

then reappear.

The base Picture Style will be

indicated on the right of [User Def. *].

If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],

changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter

settings of the regist ered Picture Style.

If you perform [Clear all cam er a set ti ngs] (p.282), Picture Styles and

their parameters set under [User Def. *] will be reverted to their default

settings. Picture Styles registered via EOS Utility (EOS software) will

have only their modified parameters reverted to t heir default settings.

To shoot with a registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on page 135 to

select [User Def. *], then shoot.

Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,

refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.422).

142

The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in

the picture is called white balance (WB). Normally, the [Q] (Auto)

setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors

cannot be obtained with [Q], you can select the white balance to

match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

1Press the <WB> button.

[White balance] will appear.

2Select a white balanc e settin g.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)

displayed for the white balance

settings <W>, <E>, <R>, <Y>

or is the respective color

temperature.

Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance

for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure

under the actual light source to be used.

1Shoot a white object.

Look through the viewfinder and aim

the entire dotted line box (shown in

the illustration) over a plain, white

object.

Focus manually and shoot with the

standard exposure set for the white

object.



You can use any white balance setting.

B: Matching the Light SourceK

O Custom White Balance

143

B: Matching the Light SourceK

2Select [Custom White Balance].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom

White Balance], then press <0>.

The custom white balance selection

screen will appear.

3Import the white balance data.

Select the image that was captured in

step 1, then press <0>.

On the dialog screen that appears,

select [OK] and the data will be

imported.

When the menu reappears, press the

<M> button to exit the menu.

4Select [O (Custom)].

Press the <WB> button.

Select [O (Custom)], then press

<0>.

If the exposure obtain ed in step 1 differs greatly from the standard

exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.

In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured

while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome] (p.136), images

processed with a Creative filter, cropped images, and images taken with

another camera.

Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector

(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance.

The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (EOS software,

p.420) will be registered under [O]. If you perform step 3, the data for

the registered personal white balance will be erased.

144

You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have

the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature

conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be

corrected to one of nine levels.

This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color

temperature conversion or color compensating filters.

1Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].

Under the [z2] tab, select [WB

Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.

The WB correction/WB bracketing

screen will appear.

2Set the white balance correction.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to move the “ ” mark to the

appropriate position.

B is for blue, A for amber, M for

magenta, and G for green. The

image’s color balance will be adjusted

towards the color in the direction of

the move.

On the upper right, “Shift” indicates

the direction and correction amount,

respectively.

Pressing the <L> button will cancel

all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.

Press <0> to exit the setting and

return to the menu.

Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source

White Balance Correction

Sample setting: A2, G1

When the white balance is corrected, will be displayed in the

viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.

One level of the blue/amber correct ion is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds

of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating

the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)

145

u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceK

With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be

recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current

white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber

bias or magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing

(WB Bkt.). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in

single-level increments.

Set the w hite balance b racketing am ount.

In step 2 for “White Balance

Correction”, when you turn the <5>

dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will

change to “ ” (3 points).

T urning the dial to the right sets the B/

A bracketing, and turning it to the left

sets the M/G bracketing.

On the right, “Bracket” indicates the

bracketing direction and correction amount.

Pressing the <L> button will cancel

all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.

Press <0> to exit the setting and

return to the menu.

Bracketing Sequence

The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard

white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard

white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.

White Balance Auto Bracketing

B/A bias ±3 levels

During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be

lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to approx. one-

third the normal number.

You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white

balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance

bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.

Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record

the image on the card.



During Live V iew sho oting or movie shooti ng, the whit e balan ce ic on will blink.

“Bkt” stands for bracketing.

146

If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and

contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto

Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG

images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.

In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.

1Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto

Lighting Optimizer], then press

<0>.

2Select the setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

brightness and contrast corrected if

necessary.

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is

set to [1: Enable], [Auto Lighting Optimizer] will be set automatically to

[Disable].

If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure

compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,

the image may still come out bri ght. If you want a darker exposure, set

this function to [Disable].

Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.

In step 2, if you press the but ton and uncheck [X] the [Disable

during man expo ] setting, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can also be set in

the <a> mode.

147

This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise

reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high

ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the

image (shadow areas) is further reduced. Change the setting to suit the

noise level.

1Select [High ISO speed NR].

Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO

speed NR], then press <0>.

2Set the level.

Select the desired noise reduction

level, then press <0>.

[M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction]

This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].

For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned

and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with noise

reduction applied.

Setting Noise Reduction

High ISO Speed Noise Reduction

If you play back or directly print a 1+73 or 1 image with the camera,

the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal. Check

the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital Photo

Professional (EOS software, p.420).

3 Setting Noise ReductionK

148

Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.

1Select [Long exp. noise

reduction].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Long

exp. noise reduction], then press

<0>.

Long Exposure Noise Reduction

When [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is Set

If there is signifi cant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the

noise reduction effect may be minimal.

If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera

shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave

afterimages.

The image alignment may not funct i on properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are

taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.

It takes some time to record images to the card since noise reduction is

applied and the images are merged after shooting. During the

processing of th e image s, “ buSY” will be displayed in the vie wfin der and

on the LCD panel, and you canno t take another picture until the

processing is completed.

1+73 or 1 cannot be selecte d. AEB and W B bracketing cannot be

used. [z3: Long exp. noise reduction] cannot be set. If any of these

has already been selected or set, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] cannot

be set.

The [Distortion] setting will be set automatically to [Disable].

Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted

according to the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)]’s [4: AF-assist beam

firing] setting.

You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures.

If you turn off the power, change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone

mode, shoot a bulb exposure, or shoot a movie, the setting will

automatically be changed to [Standard].

[z3: Dust Delete Dat a] cannot be set.

149

3 Setting Noise ReductionK

2Set the desired setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

[Auto]

For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed

automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This

[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.

[Enable]

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.

The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with

the [Auto] setting.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with noise

reduction applied.

With [Auto] and [Enable] , the noise reduction process af ter the picture is

taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. You

cannot take another picture until the noise reduction process is

completed.

Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]

setting than with the [ Disable] or [Auto] setting.

With [Auto] and [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live Vi ew

image displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise red uction

process. The Live V iew display will not appe ar until the noi se reduction is

completed. (You cannot take another picture.)

150

Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners

look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject

outlines is called chromatic aberration. And image distortion due to lens

characteristics is called distortion. These lens aberrations and light fall-

off can be corrected. By default, Peripheral illumination and Chromatic

aberration correction are set to [Enable], and Distortion correction is set

to [Disable].

If [Cannot correct - no data] is displayed, see “Lens Correction Data”

on page 152.

1Select [Lens abe rration

correction].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens

aberration correction], then press

<0>.

2Select the setting.

Check that [Correction data

available] is displayed for the

attached lens.

Select [Peripheral illumin.], then

press <0>.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

peripheral illumination corrected.

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Peripheral Illumination Correction

Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image

periphery.

The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum

correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (EOS

software, p.420).

The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

151

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

1Select the setting.

Check that [Correction data

available] is displayed for the

attached lens.

Select [Chromatic aberration], then

press <0>.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

2Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

chromatic aberration corrected.

1Select the setting.

Check that [Correction data

available] is displayed for the

attached lens.

Select [Distortion], then press <0>.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

2Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

distortion corrected.

Chromatic Aberration Correction

Distortion Correction

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

152

The camera already contains data for lens peripheral illumination

correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction for

approx. 30 lenses. If you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination

correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction will

be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data is

registered in the camera.

With EOS Utility (EOS software), you can check which lenses have their

correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the

correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual (p.422).

For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to

Lens Correction Data

When distortion co rrection is enabled, the camera records an image

range narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (Image

periphery will be slightly cropped and resolution slightly lowered.)

Distortion correction will be reflected in the captured image, but not in the

viewfinder or Live View image during shooting.

If you set [Distortion] to [Enable], the continuous shooting speed will

decrease.

Distortion correction cannot be set in the <F> or <G> mode, w h en

shooting a movie, or when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set.

Dust Delete Data (p.287) will not be appended to images recorded with

distortion correction enabled.

153

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Cautions for Lens Correction

Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and

distortion correction cannot be appl ied to JPEG images already taken.

When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is

recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.

If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral

illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be

reflected in the image di splayed on the screen.

The correction amount will be less if the lens used does not have

distance information.

Notes for Lens Correction

If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify th e image after

shooting and check it again.

Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size

Converter is attached.

154

If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source

such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker

and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous

shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors

across the images may result.

With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light

source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker causes less

effect on exposure or color.

1Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Anti-

flicker shoot.], then press <0>.

2Select [Enable].

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

3Take the picture.

The image will be taken with reduced

unevenness of exposure or color

caused by the flicker.

3 Reducing FlickerK

When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flicke ring light source, the

shutter-release time lag may become slightly longer. Also, the

continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower, and the

shooting interval may become irregular.

This function does not work with Li ve View sh ooting and movie shooting.

In the <d> or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during

continuous shooting or if you shoot mult iple shots of the same scene at

differe nt shutt er speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid

inconsistent color tones, use the <s> or <a> mode at a fixed shutter

speed.

The color tone of images shot when [ Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to

[Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.

Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detect ed.

155

3 Reducing FlickerK

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if you set [9: Mirror lockup] to

[1: Enable], the [Anti-flicker shoot.] setting will automatically switch to

[Disable].

If the subject is against a dark backgro und or if there is a bright light in

the image, flicker may not be detected.

Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to

reduce the eff ects of the flicker even when <G> is displayed.

Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.

If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear

intermittently.

Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, expected result

may not be obtained even if you use this function.

Taking test shots is recommended.

If <G> is not displayed in t he viewfinder, under [52: V i ewfi nder

display], set [Flicker detection] to [Show] (p.72). When the camera

reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot, <G> will light.

Under a light source which does not flicker, or if no flicker is detected,

<G> will not be displayed.

If [Flicker detection] is set to [Show] and [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to

[Disable], metering under a flickering light source will cause

<G> to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting [Enable]

before shooting is recommended.

In Basic Zone modes, <G> will not be displayed, but the effects

of flicker will be reduced when you shoot.

Anti-flicker shooting also works with flash. However, the expected result

may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting.

156

The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this

camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or

Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.

In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.

1Select [Color space].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Color

space], then press <0>.

2Set the desired color space.

Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then

press <0>.

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other

industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar

with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File

System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a

sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with

Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-

processing of the image with computer software will therefore be

required.

Setting the Color Reproduction Range

Adobe RGB

If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the

first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.

The ICC profile is not appended. Refer to explanations about the ICC

profile in the Digit al Photo Professional Instr uction Manual (p.422).

157

Advanced Operations

In Creative Zone modes, you

can change various settings of

the camera as you desire to

obtain a wide variety of

shooting results, by selecting

the shutter speed and/or

aperture, adjusting the

exposure as you prefer, etc.



The

icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes.

After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the

exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and

on the LCD panel for 4 sec. (0) by the operation of

metering timer.

For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page

372.

Set the <R> switch to the left.

158

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit

the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.

*<d> stands for Prog ram.

* AE stands for Auto Exposure.

1Set the Mode Dial to <d>.

2Focus on the subject.

Look through the viewfinder and aim

the AF point over the subject. Then

press the shutter button halfway.

When focus is achieved, the focus

indicator <o> on the viewfinder’s

bottom right will light up (when in

One-Shot AF mode).

The shutter speed and aperture will

be set automatically and displayed in

the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

3Check the display.

A standard exposure will be obtained

as long as the shutter speed and

aperture display do not blink.

4Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the

shutter button completely.

Program AE

159

d: Program AE

Change the ISO speed. Use the built-in flash.

To match the subject and ambient lighting level, you can change the

ISO speed (p.132) or use the built-in flash (p.176). In the <d>

mode, the built-in flash will not fire automatically. Therefore, press

the (flash) button to raise the built-in flash when indoors or

shooting in low light.

Change the program using Program shift.

After pressing the shutter button halfway, turn the <6> dial to

change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination

(program). Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture

is taken. Program shift is not possible with flash.

Shooting Tips

If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number

blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO

speed or use flash.

If the “4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number

blink, it indicates overexposure . Decrease the ISO

speed.

Differences Between <d> and <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto)

In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering

mode, are set automaticall y to prevent sp oiled shot s. The functio ns you can

set are limit ed. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set

automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and

other functions (p.370).

160

You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the <s>

(Shutter-priority AE) mode on the Mode Dial.

*<s> stands for Time value.

1Set the Mode Dial to <s>.

2Set the desired shutter speed.

While looking at the LCD panel or in

the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.

See “Shooting T ip s” on the next p age

for advice on setting the shutter

speed.

Turning the <6> dial to the right

sets a faster shutter speed, and

turning it to the left sets a slower one.

3Take the picture.

When you focus and press the

shutter button completely, the picture

will be taken at the selected shutter

speed.

Conveying the Subject’s Movement

Blurred motion

(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.) Frozen action

(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

Shutter Speed Display

The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fracti on. However, the

LCD panel and the viewfinder display only the denominator. “0"5” indicates

0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.

161

s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement

To freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject

Use a fast shutter speed such as 1/4000 sec. to 1/500 sec.

To blur a running child or animal and convey an impression of

motion

Use a medium shutter speed such as 1/250 sec. to 1/30 sec. Follow

the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter

button to take the picture. If you use a telephoto lens, hold it steady

to prevent camera shake.

To blur a flowing river or fountain

Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to

prevent hand-held camera shake.

Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not

blink.

If you press the shutter button halfway and change

the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed,

the aperture display will also change to maintain the

same exposure (amount of light reaching the image

sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture

range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that

the standard exposure cannot be obtained.

If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (lowest f/

number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to

set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed.

If the exposure will be too bright, the minimum aperture (highest f/

number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the right to

set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed.

To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set

automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the automatically-set

aperture. The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec.

Shooting Tips

D Using the Built-in Flash

162

To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp,

set the Mode Dial to <f> (Aperture-priority AE) to adjust the depth of

field (range of acceptable focus).

*<f>

stands for Aperture value, which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside the lens.

1Set the Mode Dial to <f>.

2Set the desired aperture.

While looking at the LCD panel or

viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.



The higher the f/number , the wider the depth

of field where sharper focus is obtained in

both the foreground and background.



Turning the <

> dial to the right will set

a higher f/number (smaller aperture

opening), and turning it to the left will set a

lower f/numb er (large r ape rture open in g).

3Take the picture.

Focus and press the shutter button

completely. The picture will be taken

with the selected aperture.

Changing the Depth of Field

Sharp foreground and background

(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

Blurred background

(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

Aperture Display

The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The

f/number displayed will diff er depending on the lens. If no lens is att ached to

the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.

163

f: Changing the Depth of Field

When using an aperture with a high f/number or shooting in low

light scenes, note that camera shake can occur.

A higher aperture f/number will make the shutter speed slower.

Under low light, the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec. In such

cases, increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a

tripod.

The depth of field depends not only on the aperture, but also on

the lens and on the subject distance.

Since wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of

acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need

not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the

foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens

has a narrow depth of field.

And the closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther

subject will have a wider depth of field.



Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not blink.

If you press the shutter button halfway and change

the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed,

the shutter speed display will also change to

maintain the same exposure (amount of light

reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the

adjustable shutter speed range, the shutter speed

display will blink to indicate that the standard

exposure cannot be obtained.

If the picture will be too dark, the “30"” (30 sec.) shutter speed

display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to set

a lower f/number or increase the ISO speed.

If the picture will be too bright, the “4000” (1/ 4000 sec.) shutter

speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the

right to set a higher f/number or decrease the ISO speed.

Shooting Tips

f: Changing the Depth of Field

164

To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set

automatically to match the set aperture (autoflash exposure). The

shutter speed will be set automatically between 1/200 sec. - 30 sec. to

suit the scene’s brightness.

In low light, the main subject is exposed with the auto flash metering,

and the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set

automatically. Both the subject and background look properly exposed

with a touch of atmosphere (automatic slow-speed flash sync). If you

are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake.

Using a tripod is recommended.

To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set

[Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200

sec. (fixed)] (p.184).

The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when

the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.

Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the

LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.

Press the depth-of-field preview button

to stop down the lens to the current

aperture setting, and check the depth of

field (range of acceptable focus).

D Using the Built-in Flash

Depth-of-Field PreviewK

While looking at the Live Vi ew image (p.202) and hold ing down the depth-of -

field preview button, you can see how the range of acceptable focus will

change as you adjust the aperture.

165

You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired.

While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder , you can

set the exposure as desired. This method is called manual exposure.

*<a> stands for Manual.

1Set the Mode Dial to <a>.

2Set the ISO speed (p.132).

Set the shutter speed and aperture.

To set the shutter speed, turn the

<6> dial.



To set the a p ertu re , turn th e <

> dial.

If it cannot be set, set the <R>

switch to the left, then turn the <6>

or <5> dial.

4Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.



The exposure setting will be dis played

in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.



The exposure level mark <

> indicates

how far the current exposure level is

from the standard exposure level.

5Set the exposure and take the picture.

Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter

speed and aperture.



If the exposure level exceeds

2 stops from the standard exposure,

the end o f the exposu re level indica tor will display <

> or <

> in the

viewfinder and on the LCD panel. (On the LCD monitor, if the

exposure level exceeds

3 stops, <

> or <

> will be d is pla y e d.)

Manual Exposure

<6><5>

Exposure level mark

Standard exposure index

If ISO Auto is set , the ISO spe ed setting will change to sui t the shutter speed

and aperture in ord er to obta in a stand ard exposure. Therefore , you may not

obtain the desired exposure effect.

a: Manual Exposure

166

To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set

automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture.

The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec or bulb.

A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open for

as long as you hold down the shutter button.

It can be used to shoot fireworks and other

subjects requiring long exposures.

In step 3 on the preceding page, turn the

<6> dial to the left to set <BULB>.

The elapsed exposure time will be

displayed on the LCD panel.

I Using the Built-in Flash

BULB: Bulb Exposures

Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for

[Disable during man expo] is removed, the Aut o Lighting Op timizer can

be set even in the <a> mode (p.146).



When ISO Auto is set, yo u can pr ess th e <

> button to lock the ISO speed.

If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the

exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to

when the <A> button was pressed.

Elapsed exposure time

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image may

look slightly grainy.

You can reduce the noise due to long exposures by setting [z3: Long

exp. noise reduction] to [Auto] or [Enable] (p.148).

For bulb exposures, using a tripod and a remot e switch (sold se p arat ely,

p.367) is recommended.

You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.366) for bulb

shooting. When you press the remo te controller’s transmit button, the

bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button

again to stop the bulb exposure.

167

Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subject’s brightness

are provided. Normally, evaluative metering is recommended.

In Basic Zone modes, metering mode is set automatically.

1Select [Metering mode].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Metering

mode], then press <0>.

2Set the metering mode.

Select the desired metering mode,

then press <0>.

q Evaluative metering

General-purpose metering mode suited even

for backlit subjects. The camera sets the

exposure automatically to suit the scene.

w Partial metering

Effective where there are much brighter lights

around the subject due to backlight, etc. The

gray area in the left figure is where the

brightness is metered to obtain the standard

exposure.

r Spot metering

Effective when metering a specific part of the

subject or scene. The gray area in the left figure

is where the brightness is metered to obtain the

standard exposure. This metering mode is for

advanced users.

q Changing the Metering ModeK

168

e Center-weighted average metering

The brightness is metered at the image center

and then averaged for the entire scene. This

metering mode is for advanced users.

With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure set ting will be locked when you

press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w (Partial

metering), r (S pot metering), and e (Center-weighted averag e metering)

modes, the exposure is set at th e moment the pi cture is take n. (Pressing the

shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)

169

Set exposure compensation if the exposure (without flash) does not

come out as desired. This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes

(except <a>). You can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops

in 1/3-stop increments.

Check the exposure level indicator.



Press the shutter button halfway (

)

and check the exposure level indicator.

2Set the compensation amount.

While looking in the viewfinder or at

the LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.

If it cannot be set, set the <R>

switch to the left, then turn the <5>

dial.

3Take the picture.

To cancel the exposure

compensation, set the exposure

compensation amount back to <E>.

Setting Exposure CompensationK

Increased exposure

for a brighter image

Decreased exposure

for a darker image

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.146) is set to any setting other than

[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure

compensation for a darker image is set.

The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you

set the power switch to <2>.

After setting the exposure compensation amoun t, you can prevent the

exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally by setting

the <R> switch to the right.

The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder and on

the LCD panel goes up to only ±2 stops. If the exposure compensation

amount exceeds ±2 stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will

display or <J>.

If you want to set exposure compensation exceeding ±2 stops, setting it

with [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] (p.170) or with the Quick Control screen

(p.57) is recommende d.

170

This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the

exposure automatically (up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments) with

three shots as shown below. You can then choose the best exposure.

This is called AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing).

1Select [Expo.comp./AEB].

Under the [z2] tab, select

[Expo.comp./AEB], then press < 0>.

2Set the AEB range.

Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB

range.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the

exposure compensation amount. If

AEB is combined with exposure

compensation, AEB will be applied

centering on level of exposure

compensation.

Press <0> to set it.

When you press the <M> button

to exit the menu, the AEB range will

be displayed on the LCD panel.

3Take the picture.

Focus and press the shutter button

completely. The three bracketed

shots will be taken in this sequence:

standard exposure, decreased

exposure, and increased exposure.

3 Auto Exposure BracketingK

Standard exposure Darker exposure

(Decreased exposure) Brighter exposure

(Increased exposure)

AEB range

171

3 Auto Exposure BracketingK

Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB range display (set to 0).

The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power

switch is set to <2>, flash recycling is completed, etc.

Using AEB with continuous shooting

If the drive mode is set to or <M> (p.122) and you press the

shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken

continuously in this sequence: standard exposure, decreased

exposure, and increased exposure. The shooting will then stop

automatically.

Using AEB with single shooting (u/B)

Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed

shots. The three bracketed shots will be taken in the following

sequence: standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased

exposure.

Using AEB with the self-timer or a remote controller (sold

separately)

With the self-timer or a remote control shooting (<Q> or <l>),

you can take three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.

With <q> (p.124) set, the number of continuous shots will be three

times the number set.

Canceling AEB

Shooting Tips

During AEB, <A> in the viewfinder and AEB range will blink.

AEB cannot be used with flash, [ Multi Shot Noise Reduction], Creative

filters, or bulb exposures.

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.146) is set to any setting other

than [Disable], the effect of AEB may be reduced.

172

You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from

the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at

the same exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure,

then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is

effective for backlit subjects, etc.

1Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

The exposure setting will be

displayed.

2Press the <A> button. (0)

The <A> icon lights up in the

viewfinder to indicate that the

exposure setting is locked (AE lock).

Each time you press the <A> button,

the current autoexposure setting is

locked.

3Recompose and take the picture.

If you want to maintain the AE lock

while taking more shots, hold down

the <A> button and press the shutter

button to take another shot.

* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied to the

center AF point.

A Locking the ExposureK

AE Lock Effects

Metering Mode

(p.167) AF Point Selection Method (p.116)

Automatic Selection Manual Selection

q*AE lock is applied at the AF

point that achieved focus. AE lock is applied at the

selected AF point.

wre AE lock is applied to the center AF point.

AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.

173

Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action is called “mirror

shock”. Mirror lockup can reduce the blur caused by camera vibrations.

This is useful especially when you are using a super telephoto lens or

shooting closeups (macro photography).

Mirror lockup is enabled by setting [9: Mirror lockup] to [1: Enable]

in [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.356).

1 Focus on the subject, then press the shutter button

completely.

The mirror will swing up.

2 Press the shutter button completely again.

The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.

After taking the picture, set [9: Mirror lockup] to [0: Disable].

Using the self-timer <Q>, <l> with mirror lockup

When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up.

The picture will be then taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.

Remote control shooting

Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote

control shooting together with mirror lockup can further reduce

camera shake (p.366). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold

separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button to lock up

the mirror, and the picture will be taken 2 sec. after the mirror lockup.

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera ShakeK

Shooting Tips

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera ShakeK

174

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,

take the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.

If you use the self-timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror

lockup, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay

time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the

self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no

picture w i ll be taken .

During mirror lockup, shoo ting function settings and menu operations,

etc. are disabled.

If you use flash, the red-eye reducti on lamp will not light up (p.177).

Even if you set the drive mode to , <M>, or <q>, the camera

will still shoot in single shooting mode.

When [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Mult i Shot Noise

Reduction], four continuous shots will be taken for the sin gle picture

regardless of the [9: Mirror lockup] set ting.

If 30 sec. elapse after the mirror is locked up, it will go back down

automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the

mirror again.

175

Flash Photography

This chapter explains ho w to shoot with built-in flash

and external Speedlites (EX-series, sold separately),

how to set flash settings with the camera’s menu

screen, and how to use the built-in flash for wireless

flash shooting.

Flash cannot be used with movie shooting. It will not fire.

AEB cannot be used with flash.

176

In indoor, low light, or backlit conditions in daylight, just raise the built-in

flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures. In the <d>

mode, the shutter speed (1/60 sec. - 1/200 sec.) will be set

automatically to prevent camera shake.

1Press the <D> button.

In Creative Zone modes, you can

press the <D> button anytime to take

flash pictures.

While the flash is recycling, “buSY” is

displayed in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel.

2Press the shutter button halfway.

In the bottom left of the viewfinder,

check that the <D> icon is lit.

3Take the picture.

When focus is achieved and you

press the shutter button completely,

the flash will fire for the picture.

Effective Ra nge of Built-in Flash (Approx. in meters/feet)

* When a high ISO speed is set and focusing distance is long, appropriate

exposure may not be obtained depending on the subject conditions, etc.

D Using the Built-in Flash

ISO Speed

(p.132)

EF-S18-135 m m f/3.5-5.6 IS STM, EF-S18-55mm f/3 .5-5.6 IS STM,

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM, EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

Wide Angle Telephoto

f/3.5 f/4 f/5.6

ISO 100

1 - 3.4 / 3.3 - 11.2 1 - 3 / 3.3 - 9.8 1 - 2.1 / 3.3 - 6.9

ISO 400

1 - 6.9 / 3.3 - 22.6 1 - 6 / 3.3 - 19.7 1 - 4.3 / 3.3 - 14.1

ISO 1600

1.7 - 13.7 / 5.6 - 44.9 1.5 - 12 / 4.9 - 39.4 1.1 - 8.6 / 3.6 - 28.2

ISO 6400

3.4 - 27.4 / 11.2 - 89.9 3 - 24 / 9.8 - 78.7 2.1 - 17.1 / 6.9 - 56.1

177

D Using the Built-in Flash

In bright light, decrease the ISO speed.

If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO

speed.

Detach the lens hood. Do not get too close to the subject.

If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject,

the bottom of the picture may look dark due to the obstructed flash.

For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make

sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).

Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can

reduce red eye.

Red-eye reduction will function in any shooting mode except <7>,

<3>, <5>, <x>, or <G>.

Under the [z1] tab, select [Red-eye

reduc.], then press <0>.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

For flash photography, when you

press the shutter button halfway, the

red-eye reduction lamp will light up.

Then when you press the shutter

button completely, the picture will be

taken.

Shooting Tips

3 Red-eye Reduction

The red-eye reduction feature is more ef fective when the subject looks at

the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are

close to the subject.

When you press the shutter button halfway, the

scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will

shrink and turn off. For best results, take the picture

after this scale display turns off.

The effecti ve ness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the

individual subject.

D Using the Built-in Flash

178

Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject

does not come out as desired. You can set the exposure compensation

up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

1Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear

(p.57).

2Select [y].

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to select [y*].

[Flash exposure comp.] will be

displayed at the bottom.

3Set the exposure compensation

amount.

If the exposure is too dark, turn the

<6> dial to the right (for increased

exposure).

If the exposure is too bright, turn the

<6> dial to the left (for decreased

exposure).

When you press the shutter button halfway, the <y> icon will

appear in the viewfinder.

After taking the picture, cancel the flash exposure

compensation by setting it back to 0.

y Flash Exposure CompensationK

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.146) is set to any setting other

than [Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased flash

exposure compensation is set.



If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite (sold

separately, p.181), you cannot set the flash ex posure comp ensation with the

camera (Quick Control or External flash function settings). If it is set with both

the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.

179

D Using the Built-in Flash

If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash, the subject may

turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background, etc. Use FE

lock in such a case. After setting the proper flash exposure for the subject,

you can recompose (put the subject toward the side) and shoot. This

feature can also be used with a Canon EX-series Speedlite.

* FE stands for Flash Exposure.

1Press the <D> button.

The built-in flash will be raised.

Press the shutter button halfway and

look in the viewfinder to check that

the <D> icon is lit.

2Focus on the subject.

3Press the <A> button. (8)



Aim the viewfinder center over the

subject where you want to lock the flash

exposure, then press the <

> button.

The flash will fire a preflash and the

required flash output is calculated

and retained in memory.

In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed

for a moment and <d> will light up.

Each time you press the <A> button, a preflash is fired and the

required flash output is calculated and retained in memory.

A Locking the Flash Exposure (FE lock)K

The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you

set the power switch to <2>.

You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash

settings] in [z1: Flash control] (p.186).

D Using the Built-in Flash

180

4Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the

shutter button completely.

The flash is fired, and the picture is

taken.

If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash,

the <D> icon will blink. Move closer to the subject and repeat step s

2 to 4

FE lock is not possible during Live View shooting.

181

Basically operates like a built-in flash for easy operation.

When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the

camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other

words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the

built-in flash.

For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s

instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all

the features of EX-series Speedlites.

D Using an External Speedlite

EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites

Shoe-mount Speedlites Macro Lites

With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settin gs

(p.183), only [Flash exp. comp] and [E-TTL II meter.] can be set for

[External flash func. setti ng]. ([Shutter sync.] can also be set with

certain EX-series Speedlites.)

If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, the

flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera’s LCD

monitor will change from y to 0.

D Using an External Speedlite

182

With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL

autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.

Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or

<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before

shooting.

When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the

manual flash mode.

Sync Speed

The camera can synchronize with compact, non-Canon flash units at

1/200 sec. or slower shutter speeds. Use a sync speed slower than

1/200 sec.

Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes

properly with the camera.

Cautions for Live View Shooting

A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.

Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series

Using Non-Canon Flash Units

If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to

another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and

malfunction may result .

Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may

not fire.

183

With the built-in flash or an EX-series, external Speedlite compatible

with flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu to set flash

functions and the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions.

If you use an external Speedlite, attach the S peedlite to the camera

and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions. For

details on the external Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the

Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Select [Flash control].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash

control], then press <0>.

The Flash control screen will appear.

Normally, set this to [Enable].

If [Disable] is set, neither the built-

in flash nor the external Speedlite

will fire. This is useful when you want

to use only the flash’s AF-assist

beam.

For normal flash exposures, set this

to [Evaluative].

[Average] is for advanced users. As

with an external Speedlite, the

metering area is averaged. Flash

exposure compensation may be

necessary.

3 Setting the FlashK

[Flash firing]

[E-TTL II meter.]

Even if [Flash firing] is set to [Disable], if focus is diffi cult to achieve in low

light, the flash may still fire a series of flashes (AF-assist beam, p.113).

3 Setting the FlashK

184

You can set the flash-sync speed for

flash photography in the aperture-priority

AE (f) mode.

N: Auto

The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200

sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is

also possible.

V: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto

Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.

It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.

However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,

the background may come out dark.

W: 1/200 sec. (fixed)

The flash-sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively

prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec.

auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out

darker than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].

[Flash sync. speed in Av mode]

If [1/200-1/ 60sec. auto] or [1/200 se c. (fixe d)] is set, hi gh-speed sync is not

possible in the <f> mode with the external Speedlite.

185

3 Setting the FlashK

When you use the built-in flash or an

external, EX-series S peedlite compatible

with flash function settings, you can

press the <D> button to directly display

the [Built-in flash settings] or [External

flash func. setting] screen without first

displaying the menu screen.

With built-in flash Press the <D> button twice.

The built-in flash will be raised.

Press the button again to display the

[Built-in flash settings] screen.

With external Speedlite Press the <D> button.

With the external S peedlite turned on,

press the <D> button to display the

[External flash func. setting]

screen.

Displaying the Flash Function Setting Screen Directly

When you press the <D> button to displa y the flash function setting

screen, you cannot set [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], [Flash sync.

speed in Av mode], or [External flash C.Fn setting]. Set these

functions with [z1: Flash control] instead.

If [Flash firing] is set to [Disable] and you press the <D> button, the

[z1: Flash control] screen will appear.

3 Setting the FlashK

186

You can set the functions in the table below . The functions displayed under

[

External flash func. setting

] vary depending on the S peedlite model.

Select [Built-in flash set tings] or

[External flash func. setting].

The flash function setting screen will

be displayed. With [Built-in flash

settings], only the highlighted

functions can be selected and set.

Main Functions for [Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. settings ]

*For [FEB] (Flash exposure bracketing) and [ Flash zoom], refer to the in struction

manual of a Speedlite compatible with the functions.

[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. setting]

Function

[Built-in flash settings][External

flash func.

setting]Page

Normal

Firing

Easy

Wireless

(p.192)

Custom

Wireless

(p.195)

Flash mode k k 187

Shutter

synchronization kk187

FEB* k

Wireless functions k k 187

Flash exposure

compensation kkk k178

Flash ratio control k

Master flash firing k

Flash zoom* k

[Built-in flash settings][External flash func. setting]

Flash mode

Flash zoom

(Flash coverage)

Flash exposure

compensation

Wireless functions

Shutter

synchronization

FEB

Sample screen

187

3 Setting the FlashK

Flash mode

When using an external Speedlite, you can select the flash mode to

suit your desired flash shooting.

[E-TTL II] is the standard mode of

EX-series Speedlites for automatic

flash shooting.

[Manual flash] is for advanced users

who want to set the [Flash output]

(1/1 to 1/128) themselves.

Regarding other flash modes, refer to

the instruction manual of a Speedlite

compatible with the functions.

Shutter synchronization

Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately

after the exposure starts.

[2nd curtain]

is set, the flash w ill fire rig ht b efore the shutter closes.

When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail

of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel.

With E-TTL II (auto flash ex posure), tw o flashes will be fired: on ce when

you press the shutter button completely, and once immediately before

the exposure ends. Also, if the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-

curtain synchronization will be applied automatically .

If an external S peedlite is attached, you can also select [High-speed

synchronization] (e). For details, refer to the Speedlite’s

instruction manual.

Wireless functions

When performing optical transmission wireless flash shooting using

the master function of the built-in flash, see “Using Wireless Flash”

on page 189. When performing wireless flash shooting with radio or

optical transmission using the master function of the external

Speedlite, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Flash exposure compensation

See “Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 178.

3 Setting the FlashK

188

The Custom Functions displayed under [External flash C.Fn setting]

vary depending on the Speedlite model.

1Display the Custom Functi on.

With the camera ready to shoot with

an external Speedlite, select

[External flash C.Fn setting], then

press <0>.

2Set the Custom Function.



Press the <

> <

> keys to select the

function number, then set the function.

The procedure is the same as setting the

camera’s Cu stom Functions (p.350).

1Select [Clear settings].

Under the [z1: Flash control] tab,

select [Clear settings], then press

<0>.

2Select the settings to be cleared.



Select [

Clear built-in flash set.

[

Clear external flash set.

], or [

Clear

ext. flash C.Fn set.

], then press <

When you select [OK], the respective

flash settings will be cleared.

Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions

Clearing the Settings

With an EX-series Speedlite, if the [

Flash metering mode]

Custom Function is

set to [

TTL flash metering

] (autoflash), the Speedlite will always fire at full output.

The S peedlit e’s Pe rsonal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled with th e

camera’s [Flash control] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.

189

The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit for Canon EX-

series, external Speedlites having a wireless slave feature. It can

wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire via optical transmission.

Be sure to read the instructions and cautions about wireless flash

photography (optical transmission) in the Speedlite’s instruction

manual.

Regarding your S peedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and

set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for the slave

unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of Speedlite

slave units can be used and controlled together.

(1) Set the external Speedlite as a slave unit.

(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same channel

as set on the camera.*1

(3) For flash ratio control (p.197), set the slave unit’s firing group.

(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown

below.

(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.*2

Using Wireless FlashK

Slave Unit Settings and Position

Example of Wireless Flash Set-up

Indoors

Outdoors

Approx. 10 m/32.8 ft.

Approx. 7 m/23.0 ft.

Approx. 80°

Approx. 5 m/

16.4 ft. Approx. 7 m/

23.0 ft.

Using Wireless FlashK

190

*1: If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function, it

operates regardless of the channel set on the camera.

*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face

the camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be

received by the slave unit. When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed light-

emitting unit (flash head) and wireless sensor , t ake pictures while making sure it

can fire.

Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off

To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s <A>

button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave unit’s test

firing (PILOT) button to cancel the auto power off.

The camera’s master function cannot be used for wireless flash shooting

with radio transmission.

191

Using Wireless FlashK

The tables below show the possible configurations for wireless flash

shooting. Choose the configuration suiting the subject, shooting

conditions, the number of external Speedlites you use, etc.

Wireless Flash Shooting Configurations

External Sp eedlite Built-in

Flash Page Setting

Quantity A:B

Flash

Ratio

Wireless

Functions

Firing Group

Fully

Automatic

(E-TTL II

autoflash)

Single - - p.192 01 All

Single -Used p.195 0:3-

Multiple - - p.194 01 All

Multiple Set - p.197 01(A:B)

Multiple -Used p.198 0+31 All and 2

Multiple Set Used 0+31(A:B)2

• Flash exposure

compensation p.199

• FE lock

External Sp eedlite Built-in

Flash Page Setting

Quantity

A:B Flash

Ratio

Wireless

Functions

Firing Group

Manual

Flash

Single/

Multiple --

p.200

01 All

Multiple Set -01(A:B)

Single/

Multiple -Used 0+31 All and 2

Multiple Set Used 0+31(A:B)2

Even if you disable the built-in flash from firing, it will still fire in order

to control the slave unit via optical transmission. The flash fired to

control the slave unit may therefore appear in the picture depending on the

shooting conditions.

192

The basics of easy , fully automatic wireless flash shooting are explained

below.

Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all

wireless flash shooting. Therefore,

these steps are omitted in other

wireless flash setups explained on

the pages hereafter.

1Press the button to raise the

built-in flash.

For wireless flash shooting, be sure

to raise the built-in flash.

2Select [Flash control].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash

control], then press <0>.

3Select [Evaluative].

For [E-TTL II meter.], select

[Evaluative], then press <0>.

Easy Wireless Flash ShootingK

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite

193

Easy Wireless Flash ShootingK

4Select [Built-in flash settings].

Select [Built-in flash set tings], then

press <0>.

5Select [EasyWireless].

For [Built-in flash], select

[EasyWireless], then press <0>.

6Set [Channel].

Set the transmission channel (1-4) to

the same one as the slave unit.

7Take the picture.

Set the camera and take the picture

in the same way as with normal

shooting.

8Exit the wireless flash shooting.

For [Built-in flash], select

[NormalFiring].

Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.

Even though the fir i ng of the built-in flash is disabled wh en

[EasyWireless] is set, it will still fire a small flash in order to control the

slave unit. Depending on shooting conditions, the flash fired to control

the slave unit may appear in the picture.

Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit.

Easy Wireless Flash ShootingK

194

You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single S peedlite.

This is convenient when you need a large flash output.

Basic settings:

Flash mode : E-TTL II

E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative

Built-in flash : EasyWireless

Channel : (Same as slave units)

All the slave units will fire at the same

output and be controlled to obtain a

standard exposure.

No matter which firing group (A, B, or C)

the slave units belong to, they will all fire

as one group.

If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright, you can set flash

exposure compensation to adjust the slave units’ flash output.

Select [1exp. comp.], then press

<0>.



If the flash exposure is too dark, press the

> key to increase the flash exposure

and make it brighter . If the flash exposure is

too bright, press the <

> key to decrease

the flash exposure and make it darker.

Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites

Flash Exposure Compensation

195

This is fully automatic wireless flash

shooting with one external S peedlite and

the built-in flash.

You can change the flash ratio between

the external Speedlite and built-in flash

to adjust how the shadows cast on the

subject.

On the menu screens, the <0> and

<1> icons indicate the external

Speedlite, and the <3> and <2>

icons indicate the built-in flash.

1Select [CustWireless].

Follow step 5 on page 193 to select

[CustWireless], then press <0>.

2Select [Wireless func.].

For [Wireless func.], select [0:3],

then press <0>.

3Set the desired flash ratio and

take the picture.

Select [0:3] and set the flash ratio

within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio

to the right of 1:1 is not possible.

If the built-in flash output is not

enough, set a higher ISO speed

(p.132).

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and Built-in Flash

The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop in crements ).

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

196

Multiple Speedlite slave units can be fired as one flash unit, or

separated into slave groups for shooting with flash ratio control.

The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]

setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple

Speedlites.

Basic settings:

Flash mode : E-TTL II

E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative

Wireless func. :0

Channel : (Same as slave units)

[1All] Firing multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit

Convenient when you need a large flash

output. All the slave units will fire at the

same output and be controlled to obtain

a standard exposure.

No matter which firing group (A, B, or C)

the slave units belong to, they will all fire

as one group.

Set [Firing group] to [1All], the n

take the picture.

Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites

197

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

[1 (A:B)] Firing multiple slave units in multiple groups

You can divide the slave units into

groups A and B, and change the flash

ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect.

Refer to the Speedlite’s instruction

manual and set one slave unit to firing

group A and the other to firing group B.

Position the Speedlites as shown in the

illustration.

1Select [Wireless func.].

Follow step 2 on page 195 to select

[0], then press <0>.

2Set [Firing group] to [1 (A:B)].

3Set the A:B flash ratio and shoot.

Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the

flash ratio.

A B

If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.

The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/ 2-

stop increments).

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

198

The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained

on pages 196-197.

The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]

setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple

Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.

1Basic settings:

Flash mode : E-TTL II

E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative

Wireless func. : [0+3]

Channel : (Same as slave units)

2Select [Firing group].

Select the firing group, then set the

flash ratio, flash exposure

compensation, and other necessary

settings before shooting.

Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and Multiple External Speedlites

A B

[1 (A:B) 2][1 All and 2]

199

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation

can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below)

which can be set vary depending on the [Wireless func.] and [Firing

group] settings. [Flash exp. comp.]

The set amount of flash exposure

compensation will be applied to the

built-in flash and all the external

Speedlites.

[2 exp. comp.]

Flash exposure compensation is

applied only to the built-in flash.

[1 exp. comp.]

The set amount of flash exposure

compensation will be applied to all

the external Speedlites.

If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <A> button to

perform FE lock.

Flash Expo sure Compe nsatio n

FE Lock

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

200

When [Flash m ode ] is set to [Manual flash], flash exposure can be set

manually. The flash output settings that can be set ([1 flash output],

[Group A output], etc.) vary depending on the [Wireless func.] setting

(see below). [Wireless func.0]

[Firing group: 1All]:

The manual flash output setting is

applied to all the external Speedlites.

[Firing group: 1 (A:B)]:

You can set the flash output

separately for slave groups A and B.

[Wireless func.0+3]

[Firing group: 1All and 2]:

The flash output can be set

separately for the external

Speedlite(s) and built-in flash.

[Firing group: 1 (A:B)2]:

You can set the flash output

separately for slave groups A and B.

You can also set the flash output for

the built-in flash.

Setting the Flash Output Man ually for Wir eless Fl ash Shoo ting

201

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

You can shoot while viewing the picture on the camera’s

LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.

If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the

LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.

Using a tripod is recommended.

Remote Live View Shooting

With EOS Utility ( EOS sof t ware, p.42 0) in stalled on your computer,

you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely

while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual (p.422).

202

1Display the Live View image.

Press the <A> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor. In the <A> mode,

the scene icon for the scene detected

by the camera is displayed on the

upper left (p.206).

By default, Continuous AF (p.214) will take effect.

The Live View image will closely reflect the brightness level of the

actual image you capture.

2Focus on the subject.

When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus with

the current AF method (p.218).

3Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely.

The picture will be taken and the

captured image is displayed on the

LCD monitor.

When the playback display ends, the

camera will return to Live View

shooting automatically.

Press the <A> button to exit the

Live View shooting.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with the image-recording

quality set to JPEG 73).

In Creative Zone mo des, you can check th e depth of fie ld by pressin g the

depth-of-field preview button.

You can also tap the subject on the LCD monitor to focus (p.218-225)

and shoot (p.226).

You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.366) for Live

View sh ooting.

203

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Set [A: Live View shoot.] to [Enable].

Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting

(Approx. number of shots)

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pa ck LP-E17 and CIPA

(Camera & Imaging Produ cts Association) testing standa rds.

With a fully-charged Batt ery Pack LP-E17 , continuous Live View shooting is

possible for approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F).

Enabling Live View Shooting

Temperature Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F) Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

No Flash 200 170

50% Flash Use 180 150

In the <x> mode, Live View shooting is not possible.

In the <F> and <G> modes, the shooting range will be smaller.

When the flash is recycling, “BUSY” is displayed on the LCD monitor,

and you cannot view the subject.

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

General Live View Shooting Cautions are on pages 230-231.



When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot will

be taken. Also, the time it takes to capture an image after you press the

shutter but ton com pletel y will b e slig htly lo nger th an wit h viewfind er shoo ting .

If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn

off automatically after the time set in [ 52: Auto power off] (p.273). If

[52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end

automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).

With the HDMI cable HTC-100 ( sold sep ara tel y) or st ereo AV cable AVC-

DC400ST (sold separately), you can display the Live View image on a

TV set (p.312, 315).

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

204

Each time you press the button, the information display will

change.

The number will be displayed when the maximum burst decr eases to nine or lower.

Information Display

ISO speed

Digital compass

Shutter speed

Metering mode

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)

AEB/FEB/Multi Shot

Noise Reduction

Histogram display

Drive mode

AE lock

Flash-ready/Flash off

Auto Lighting Optimizer

GPS connection indicator

Eye-Fi card

transmission

status

Shooting mode

Exposure level indicator/AEB range

Magnified view

Switch to auto

selection

(AF point)

Touch shutter

Quick Control

White balance/

White balance

correction

Creative filters

Battery check

Picture Style

Image-recording

quality

Highlight tone priority

Exposure

simulation

Flash exposure compensation

AF method

Possible shots

AF operation

Aperture

Maximum burst*

205

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

You can display the el ectronic lev el by pressing th e button

(p.70). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera

is connected to a TV set with a HDMI cable, the el ectronic level cannot

be displaye d .

You can display the histogram by pressing the button. However,

the histogram is not displayed while pressing the shutter button

completely.

When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image

brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.

If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at

a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low-

or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect

the exposure setting. Note that noise may be more noticeable than the

actual image recorded.

If the <F> or <G> shooting mode, Multi Shot Noise Red uction, flash, or

bulb exposure is used, the <g> icon and histogr am will be grayed out

(for your reference). The hist ogram may not be properly displayed in low-

or bright-light conditions.

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, pro l onged contact with the same

body part may cause skin redness, blister i ng or low-temperature contact

burns. Using a tripod is recommended for peo ple with circulation problems

or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

206

In the <A> shooting mode, the camera will detect the scene type and

set everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type

is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or

shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF

method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is

detected.

*2: Displayed when the att ached lens h as dista nce informati on. Wit h an Extension

Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed .

*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:

The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on

a tripod.

Scene Icons

Subject Portrait*1 Non-Portrait

Background

Color

Background

Movement Nature and

Outdoor Scene Movement

Close*2

Bright Gray

Backlit

Blue Sky

Included Light blue

Backlit

Sunset *3 *3

Orange

Spotlight

Dark blue

Dark

With

Tripod *4*5 *3 *4*5 *3

207

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:

• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II

• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM • EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.

*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the sh utter speed will slow

down.

The final image simulation reflects the settings of the Picture Style,

white balance and other functions in the Live View image so you can

see what the captured image will look like.

During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the

function settings listed below.

Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting

Picture Style

* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color

tone will be reflected.

White balance

White balance correction

Light/scene-based shots

Background blur (in <C> mode)

* You can check the effect only during the setting procedure (when

[Simulating blur] is disp layed).

Color tone

Metering mode

Exposure

Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Peripheral illumination correction

Chromatic aberration correction

Highlight tone priority

Aspect ratio (shooting range confirmation)

Final Image Simulation

208

Function settings particular to Live View shooting are explained here.

If you press the <Q> button when the image is displayed on the LCD

monitor in a Creative Zone mode, you can set the following: AF

method, AF operation, Drive mode, Metering mode, Image-recording

quality, White balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and

Creative filters.

In Basic Zone modes, you can set the functions shown in the table on

page 99 (except background blur), as well as the functions in bold

above.

1Press the <Q> button (7).

The settable functions will be

displayed.

2Select a function and set it.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select a

function.

The settings of the function and

Feature guide (p.73) will appear.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the

function.

In the <8> mode, select the

shooting mode box on the upper left

of the screen, then press <0> to

select the shooting mode.

To set the drive mode’s <q>

setting, WB correction/WB

bracketing, Picture Style parameters,

or Creative filter effects, press the

button.

Shooting Function Settings

Q Quick Control

209

Shooting Function Settings

3Exit the setting.

Press <0> to finalize the setting and

return to Live View shooting.

You can also select [2] to return to

Live View shooting.

In Creative Zone modes, you can set the ISO speed by pr essing the

<g> button.

With Live View shootin g, you cannot set or <M> for the drive

mode.

When you set w (Part i al metering) or r (Spot metering), a circle

indicating the metering are a will be displayed on the center of the scr een.

210

While viewing the Live View image, you can apply a filter effect (Grainy

B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect, Water painting effect,

Toy camera effect, or Miniature effect) for shooting. These are called

Creative filters.

When you take the picture, the camera saves only the image with the

Creative filter applied. If you also want to save the image without a

Creative filter applied, take the picture without a Creative filter. Then

apply a Creative filter effect and save it as a new image (p.326).

1Set any shooting mode except

<x>, <F>, or <G>.

2Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

3Select [q].

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[q] (Creative filter) on the right side

of the screen.

4Select a filter.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a

filter (p.212).

The image will be displayed with the

effects of the filter applied.

U Applying Creative Filters

211

U Applying Creative Filters

5Adjust the filter effect.

Press the button (except for

Miniature effect).

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust

the filter effect, then press <0>.

For the Miniature effect, press <0>,

then press the <W> <X> keys to

move the white frame to where you

want the image to look sharp.

6Take the picture.

The image is shot with the filter

applied.

Even if you set the drive mode to or <q>, the camera will still shoot

in single shooting mode.

You cannot shoot with Creative filters i f the reco rding qua lity is 1+73

or 1, or if AEB, white balance bracketing, or Multi Shot Noise

Reduction is set.

The histogram is not displayed when you shoot with Creative filters.

With Grainy B/W , the grainy ef fect displayed on the LCD monitor will look

different from the grainy effect recorded in the picture.

With the Soft focus and Miniature effects, the blurred effect displayed on

the LCD monitor will look different from the blurred ef fe ct recor ded i n th e

picture. In Creative Zone modes, you can check the picture’s blurred

effect by pressing the depth-of-field preview button.

Dust Delete Data (p.287) will not be appended to images shot with Fish-

eye effect applied.

U Applying Creative Filters

212

VGrainy B/W

Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the black-

and-white effect by adjusting the contrast.

WSoft focus

Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness

by adjusting the blur.

XFish-eye effect

Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type

distortion.

Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along

the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter expands

the center part of the image, the resolution at the center may

decrease depending on the number of recorded pixels. Check the

image on the screen when setting this filter. The AF method will be

FlexiZone - Single (fixed at center).

YArt bold effect

Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more

three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note

that the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered

with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant

noise.

ZWater painting effect

Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You

can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that

night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth

gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.

Creative Filter Characteristics

213

U Applying Creative Filters

bToy camera effect

Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it

look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast

by adjusting the color tone.

cMiniature effect

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks

sharp. In step 5 on page 211, if you press the button (or tap

[T] on the lower right of the screen), you can switch between the

white frame’s vertical and horizontal orientations. The AF method

will be FlexiZone - Single to focus at the center of the white frame.

214

The menu options displayed are as

follows.

The settable functions on this menu

screen apply only to Live View

shooting. They do not work with

viewfinder shooting (settings are

disabled).

Live View shooting

You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].

AF method

You can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZ one -

Single]. See pages 218-225 for more about the AF method.

Continuous AF

The default setting is [Enable].

The camera focuses the subject continuously to achieve rough

focus. This makes it quicker to achieve focus when you press the

shutter button halfway. If [Enable] is set, the lens will operate

constantly and consume more battery power. This will reduce the

number of possible shots due to shorter battery life.

If you want to set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> during

Continuous AF, first stop Live View shooting.

Touch Shutter

Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take

the picture automatically. For details, see page 226.

Grid display

With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines. You can

check horizontal or vertical tilt when shooting.

3 Menu Function Settings

215

3 Menu Function Settings

Metering timerK

You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

time). In Basic Zone modes, metering timer is fixed at 8 sec.

Selecting any of the following operations will stop Live View shooting. To

start Live View sh ooting again, press the <A> button.

•[z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear settings ],

or [54: z firmware ver.]

216

You can select the AF (autofocus) operation characteristics suiting the

shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF

operation is set for the respective shooting mode.

1Press the <Q> button.

The Quick Control screen will appear.

2Select [X].

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[X] (AF operation) on the

screen’s left side.

3Select the AF operation.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the desired AF operation, then press

<0>.

4Focus on the subject

Aim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway. The

camera will then autofocus in the

selected AF operation.

Changing the Autofocus OperationK

If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs, the

picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely.

Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or see “Shooting Conditions

that Make Focusing Difficult” (p.224).

217

Changing the Autofocus OperationK

Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus only once.

When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper

will sound.

While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be

locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold

down the shutter button halfway , the camera will keep focusing on

the subject continuously.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

The continuous shooting speed becomes slower since the camera

keeps focusing and shooting continuously.

Setting the [AF method] to [FlexiZone - Single] is recommended.

Depending on the shooting conditions, it may take a moment until

the shutter is released.

Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the

subject’s speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct

focus.

If you operate the zoom during continuous shooting, the focus may

be lost. Shoot after using the zoom to obtain the desired

composition.

When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

Servo AF for Moving Subjects

If [z1: Beep ] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus

is achieved.

During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also

be applied to the subsequent shots.

With Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.

218

You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your

subject. The following AF methods are provided: [u(face)+Tracking],

[FlexiZone - Multi] (p.220), and [FlexiZone - Single] (p.222).

If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to

<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.228).

Select the AF method.

Under the [A] tab, select [AF

method].

Select the desired AF method, then

press <0>.

While the Live View image is

displayed, you can also press the

<Q> button to select the AF method

on the Quick Control screen (p.208).

The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the

AF point also moves to track the face.

1Display the Live View image.

Press the <A> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

2Select an AF point.

When a face is detected, the AF point

will appear over the face to be

focused on.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

Selecting the AF Method

u(face)+Tracking:c

If [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], the AF point will turn blue when

focus is achieved (p.216). The beeper will not sound in this case.

In the <5> and <C> modes, Servo AF is set automatically and when

focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue and the beeper will sound.

219

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

If multiple faces are detected, <e>

will be displayed. Use the <Y> <Z>

keys to move the <e> frame over

the face you want to focus on.

You can also tap on the LCD monitor

screen to select the face or subject. If

the subject is not a face, <z> will be

displayed.



If no faces can be detected, or if you

tap on the LCD monitor but do not

select any face or subject, the camera

will switch to [

FlexiZone - Multi

] with

automatic selection (p.220).

3Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway to

focus.

When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

If focus is not achieved, the AF point

will turn orange.

4Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.202).

If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face dete ction will not b e

possible. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and

focus manually.

An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.

Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the

picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.

The may cover only a part of the face.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

220

You can use up to 49 AF points for wide-area focusing (automatic

selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing

(zone selection).

1Display the Live View image.

Press the <A> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

2Select the AF point.J

Pressing <0> or the <L> button will

toggle between automatic selection

and zone selection. In Basic Zone

modes, automatic selection is set

automatically.

Use the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys

to select a zone. To return to the

center zone, press <0> or the <L>

button again.

You can also tap on the LCD monitor

screen to select a zone. When a zone

is selected, tap [n] on the screen

to switch to automatic selection.

FlexiZone - Multi:o

If you press <0> or the <L> button, the AF point <z> will appear at

the center and you can use the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys to move

the AF point.

Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edg e of the

picture, t he will be grayed out. If you press the shutter button

halfway, the subject will be focused on, in FlexiZone - Multi method with

automatic selection.

Area frame

221

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

3Focus on the subject.

Aim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway.

When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

If focus is not achieved, the area

frame will turn orange.

4Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.202).

If the camera doe s not focus on the desired t arget subj ect with automatic

AF point selection, select a zone or switch the AF method to [FlexiZone

- Single] and refocus.

The number of AF points varies, depending on the [A3: Aspect r atio]

setting. At [3:2], [4:3], and [16:9], there are 49 AF points. At [1:1], 35 AF

points.

If [AF operation] is se t to [Servo AF], the AF point tracks the subject while

pressing the shutter bu tton half way. The AF point display will be when

a human face is detected, and <z> when a subject other than a face is

detected.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

222

The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you

want to focus on a particular subject.

1Display the Live View image.

Press the <A> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

The AF point < > will appear.

During movie shooting, if [Movie

Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF

point will be displayed in a larger size.

2Move the AF point.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to move the AF point to where

you want to focus. (It cannot go to the

edge of the screen.)



Pressing <

> or the <

> button will

return th e AF po int to th e sc re e n’s center.

You can also tap on the LCD monitor

screen to move the AF point.

3Focus on the subject.

Aim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway.



When focus is achieved, the AF point will

turn green and the beeper will sound.

If focus is not achieved, the AF point

will turn orange.

4Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.202).

FlexiZone - Single: d

AF point

223

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

AF Operation

Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway

will focus again.

The image brightness may change during and after the AF

operation.

Depending on the subject or shooting conditions, etc., focusing may

take longer or the continuous shooting speed may become slower.

If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,

the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,

exit Live View shooting and execute AF under the actual light

source.

If [u+Tracking] is set, magnified view is not possible.

When [FlexiZone - Multi] is set and you press the button (or

tap <s> on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or image

center with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you press the

shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal and the

camera will focus.

When [FlexiZone - Single] is set and you press the button (or

tap <s> on the screen), the area covered by the AF point will be

magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus in the magnified

view. This is effective when the camera is attached to a tripod and

you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing is difficult in

magnified view, return to the normal display and use AF. Note that

the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views.

If you magnify the view after focusing with [FlexiZone - Multi] or

[FlexiZone - Single] in the normal view, precise focus may not be

achieved.

Notes for

When in magnified view, Continuous AF (p.214) or Servo AF (p.217) will not

be executed.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

224

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult

Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces

or when highlight or shadow details are lost.

Subjects in low light.

Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the

horizontal direction.

Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,

computer keyboards, etc.).

Fine lines and subject outlines.

Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps

changing.

Night scenes or points of light.

The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.

Extremely small subjects.

Subjects at the edge of the picture.

Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly

reflective body, etc.).

The AF point covers both near and distant subjects (Example:

Animal in a cage, etc.).

Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still

due to camera shake or subject blur.

A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

Autofocusing while the subject is very far out of focus.

Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.

A special effect filter is used.

Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

225

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

If focus is not achieved with the shooting conditions on the preceding

page, set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.

If you use AF with any of the following lenses, focusing may take longer

or correct focus may not be achieved.

EF50mm f/1.4 USM, EF50mm f /1.8 II, EF50mm f /2.5 Compact Macro,

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM

For information on discontinued lenses, refer to the Canon Web site.

If you shoot a peripheral subject and it is out of focus, aim the center AF

point or zone over the subject to focus, focus again and then take the

picture.

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series

Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED

light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.

In magnified view, focusing may be difficult due to camera shake. Using

a tripod is recommended.

226

Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and t ake the

picture automatically. This works in all shooting modes.

1Display the Live View image.

Press the <A> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

2Enable the touch shutter.

Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.

Each time you tap on the icon, it will

toggle between [y] and [x].

[x] (Touch shutter: Enable)

You can tap on the spot to focus and

shoot.

[y] (Touch shutter: Disable)

You can tap on the spot to select

where you want to focus. Press the

shutter button completely to take the

picture.

3Tap on the screen to sh oot.

Tap on the face or subject on the

screen.

On the point you tap, the camera will

focus in the AF method that was set

(p.218-222). When [FlexiZone -

Multi] is set, it will switch to

[FlexiZone - Single].

When focus is achieved, the AF point

turns green and the picture is taken

automatically.

If focus is not achieved, the AF point

turns orange and the picture cannot

be taken. Tap on the face or subject

on the screen again.

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter

227

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter

Even if you set the drive mode to , the camera will still shoot in

single shooting mode.

Even if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], [One-Shot AF] will take

effect when touch shutter is used.

The touch shutter does not work with the magnified view.

If the Fish-eye effect Cre ative filter is set, the camera will focus using the

AF point on the center of the screen regardless of the point you tap on.

If the Miniature effect Creative filter is set, the touch shutter does not

work.

When [10: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [1: AE lock/AF] or [3: AE/

AF, no AE lock] under [54 : Custom Functions (C.Fn)], autofocusing

does not take effect.

You can also set the touch shutter with [A: Touch shutter].

To shoot with bulb exposure, t ap on the screen twice. The first t ap on the

screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the

exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the

screen.

228

You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus.

1Set the lens focus mode switch to

<MF>.

Turn the lens focusing ring to focus

roughly.

2Display the magnifying frame.

Press the button.

The magnifying frame will appear.

You can also tap [s] on the screen to

magnify the image.

3Move the magnifying fra me.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to move the magnifying frame to

the position where you want to focus.

To return to the screen’s center , press

<0> or the <L> button.

4Magnify the im age.

Each time you press the button,

the magnification of the image will

change in the following sequence:

MF: Focusing Manually

Magnifying frame

AE lock

Magnified area position

Magnification

1x 9 5x 9 10x 9 Normal view

229

MF: Focusing Manually

5Focus manually.

While looking at the magnified image,

turn the lens focusing ring to focus.

After achieving focus, press the

button to return to the normal view.

6Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button to take the

picture (p.202).

230

General Live View Shooting Cautions

Image Quality

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and

banding) may become noticeable.

Shooting in high temperat ures may cause noise and irregular colors in

the image.

If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the

camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may

deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.

If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is

high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a

few minutes before shooting again.

White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons

If the camera’ s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live

View shootin g or und er a high ambi ent tempera tu re, a whi te <s> or red

<E> icon will appear.

The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will

deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View

shooting and allow the camera to co ol down before shooting again.

The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop

automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or

turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.

Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period

will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not

shooting, always turn off the camera.

If the camera’ s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot

with high ISO speed or long exposure may dete riorate even before the

white <s> icon is displayed.

Shooting Results

If you take the picture in magnif ied view, the exposure may not come out

as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. In

magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in

orange. Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be

captured in the normal view range.

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.146) is set to any setting other

than [Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure

compensation or decreased flash expo sure compensation is set.

If you use a TS-E lens (except the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3 .5L

II) and shift or tilt the lens or use an Extension Tube, the standard

exposure may not be obtain ed or an irregular exposure may result.

231

General Live View Shooting Cautions

Live View Image

Under low- or bright-light condition s, the Live View image may not ref lect

the brightness of the captured image.

Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed

Live V iew image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image

recorded will have minimal noise. (The image quality of the Live View

image is different from that of the recorded image.)

If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen

may flicker . I f this happens, exit Live V iew shooti ng and resume shooting

under the actual light source.

If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live

View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness

level stabilizes before shooting.

If there is a very bright light so urce in the image, the bright area may

appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image

will correctly show the bright area.

In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a br ight setting , noise

or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the

noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image .

When you magnify the image, t he image sharpness may look more

pronounced than in th e act ual image.

If the shutter speed is 1 sec. or slower, “BUSY” is displayed on the LCD

monitor, and the Live View display will not appear unt il the exposure is

completed.

Custom Functions

During Live Vie w shooting, some Custom Function settings will not take

effect (p.351).

Lens and Flash

The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when

using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode,

available since the second half of 2011.

FE lock will not work if the built-in flash is used. FE lock and modeling

flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.

233

Shooting Movies

Movie shooting is enabled by

setting the power switch to

<k>. The movie recording

format will be MP4.

For cards that can record movies, see page 5.

If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera

shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is

recommended.

To shoot while handholding the camera, see page 80.

Full HD 1080

Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-

Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning

lines).

234

Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to play back the

movies shot (p.312-315).

When the shooting mode is set to any mode other than <

autoexposure control will take ef fect to suit the scene’ s cu rrent brightness.

1Set the power switch to <k>.

The reflex mirror will make a sound,

then the image will appear on the

LCD monitor.

2Set any shooting mode except

<a>.

3Focus on the subject.

Before shooting a movie, focus with

AF or manual focus (p.218-225, 228).

By default, [Movie Servo AF:

Enable] is set so that the camera will

always focus. To stop Movie Servo

AF, see page 263.

4Shoot the movie.

Press the <A> button to start

shooting a movie. To stop movie

shooting, press <A> again.

While the movie is being shot, the

“o” mark will be displayed on the

upper right of the screen.

Sound will be recorded by the built-in

microphones.

k Shooting Movies

Autoexposure Shooting

Recording movie

Built-in microphones

235

k Shooting Movies

ISO Speed in Basic Zone Modes

The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.

ISO Speed in <d>, <s>, and <f> Modes

The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.

Under [54: Custom Func tions (C.Fn)], if [ 2: ISO exp ansion] is set

to [1: On], the maximum speed will be expanded to H (equivalent to

ISO 12800).



Under [

4: Custom Functions (C.F n)

], if [

3: Highlight tone priority

]

is set to [

1: Enable

], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400.

General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 268-269.

If necessary, also read the General Live V i ew Sh ooting Cautio ns on

pages 230-231.

In Basic Zone modes, the shooting resu lt will be the same as with <A>.

Also, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed

on the upper left (p.236).

In the <f> and <s> shooting modes, movies will be taken with the

same settings as in the <d> mode.

Settable menu functions differ between Basic Zone modes an d Cr eative

Zone modes (p.374).

Shutter speed and aperture are set automatically.

In Creative Zone modes, yo u can press the <A> button (p.172) to lock

the exposure (AE lock). The exposure setting will be displayed for the

number of seconds set with [Z1: Metering timer]. After applying AE

lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <S>

button. (AE lock setting is retained until you pre ss th e <S> button.)

In Creative Zone mo des, yo u can se t t he < R> swi tch t o the lef t and

turn the <5> dial to set the exposure compensation.

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed and ISO

speed on the screen’s bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a

still photo (p.239). The exposu re setting for movie shooting is not

displayed. Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ

from that for still photo shooting.

If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture

will not be recorded in the image information (Exif).

k Shooting Movies

236

During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode, an icon representing the

scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be

adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the

icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF

method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is

detected.

*2: Displayed when the att ached lens h as dista nce informati on. Wit h an Extension

Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed .

With autoexposure (modes other than a) movie shooting, the camera

will automatically turn on the Speedlite’s LED light under low-light

conditions. For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Scene Icons

Subject Portrait*1 Non-Portrait Background

Color

Background

Nature and

Outdoor Scene Close*2

Bright Gray

Backlit

Blue Sky Included Light blue

Backlit

Sunset *3 *3 Orange

Spotlight Dark blue

Dark

Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Sepa rately)

Equipped with an LED Light

237

k Shooting Movies

In the <a> mode, you can freely set the shutter speed, aperture, and

ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies

is for advanced users.

1Set the power switch to <k>.

The reflex mirror will make a sound,

then the image will appear on the

LCD monitor.

2Set the Mode Dial to <a>.

3 Set the ISO speed.

Press the <g> button and turn the

<6> or <5> dial to select the ISO

speed.

For details on the ISO speed, see the

next page.

4Set the shutter speed and

aperture.

To set the shutter speed, turn the

<6> dial. The settable shutter

speeds vary depending on the frame

rate <9>.

•D C B:

1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.

•F E: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.

To set the aperture, turn the <5>

dial.

If it cannot be set, set the <R>

switch to the left, then turn the <6>

or <5> dial.

Manual Expos ure Sho oti ng

<6> <5>

k Shooting Movies

238

5Focus and shoot the movie.

The procedure is the same as steps 3

and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.234).

ISO Speed During Manual Exposure Shooting

With [

AUTO

] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO

100 - ISO 6400.

You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 in

whole-stop increments. Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if

[2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On], the manual setting range will

expand so you can also select H (equivalent to ISO 12800).



Under [

4: Custom Functions (C.Fn)

], if [

3: Highlight tone priority

]

is set to [

1: Enable

], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400.

Since shooting a movie at ISO 12800 may result in much noise, it is

designated as an expande d ISO speed (displayed as “H”).

If ISO speed is set to H (ISO 25600) when [2 : ISO e xpansion] is set to

[1: On] under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)] and you switch from still

photo shooting to movie shoo ting, the ISO spee d will be H (equivalen t to

ISO 12800). When you switch back t o still photo shooting, the I SO speed

will be ISO 12800.

Exposure compensation ca nn o t be se t.

Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not

recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.

If you change th e shutter speed while shoot ing under f luorescent or L ED

lighting, image flicker may be recorded.

When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO

speed.

If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the

exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.239)

compared to when the <A> button was pressed.

By pressing the button, you can display the histogram.

When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.

to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less

smooth the subject’s movement will look.

239

k Shooting Movies

Each time you press the button, the information display will

change.

* Applies to a single movie clip.

Information Display

Movie shooting mode

y: Autoexposure

(Basic Zone

modes)

k: Autoexposure

(Creative Zone

modes)

z: Manual exposure

Movie shooting remaining time* / Elapsed time

Exposure level indicator

Aperture

Movie Servo AF

Drive mode

Movie recording

size

Shutter speed

AF method

•c: u+Tracking

•o: FlexiZone - Multi

•d: FlexiZone - Single

Battery check

AE lock

Recording level: Manual

Digital zoom

Highlight tone priority

LED light

Quick Control

White balance /

HDR movie

shooting

Picture Style

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

ISO speed

Digital compass

GPS connection indicator

Wind filter: Disable

Miniature effect movie

Eye-Fi card transmission status

Frame rate

Exposure mode

Autoexposure

K:Manual

exposure

Video snapshots

Possible shots

Image-recording quality

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)

Attenuator

Magnified view

Histogram (with manual exposure)

k Shooting Movies

240

You can display the el ectronic lev el by pressing th e button

(p.70). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera

is connected to a TV set with a cable, the el ectronic level cannot be

displayed.

The electronic level, grid lines, or histog ram cannot be displayed during

movie shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a

movie.)

When movie shooting st arts, the movie shooting remaining time will

change to the elapsed time.

Cautions for Movie Shooting

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

If <Q> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie

shooting, the white bala nce may also change.

If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may

flicker.

Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended. Zooming

the lens can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the

lens’s maximum aperture changes or not. Exposure changes may be

recorded as a result.

You cannot magnify the image during movie shooting.

Be careful not to cover the built-in microphones (p.234) with your finger,

etc.

General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 268-269.

If necessary, also read the General Live V i ew Sh ooting Cautio ns on

pages 230-231.

Do not hold the camera in the same p osition for long perio ds of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, pro l onged contact with the same

body part may cause skin redness, blister i ng or low-temperature contact

burns. Using a tripod is recommended for peo ple with circulation problems

or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

241

k Shooting Movies

The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for

the Picture Style, white balance, etc., on the image.

During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the

effects of the settings listed below.

Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting

Picture Style

All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be reflected.

White balance

White balance correction

Exposure

Depth of field

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Peripheral illumination correction

Chromatic aberration correction

Highlight tone priority

HDR movie

Miniature effect movie

Final Image Simulation

Movie-related settings are und er the [Z1] and [Z2] tabs (p.263).

A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size

exceeds 4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent 4 GB.

The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording

size set to [A]).

Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphones (p.234).

Most external microphones (commerci ally available) equip ped with a 3. 5

mm diameter mini plug can be used.



You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.366) to start and

stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is <

>. Set the shooting timing

switch to <

> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit button. If the switch is

set to <

> (immediate shooti ng), still photo shooting wil l take effect.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, the total movie shooting time

will be as follows: approx. 1 hr . 20 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F),

and approx. 1 hr. at low temperatures (0°C/32°F).

The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a

(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, available

since the second half of 2011.

k Shooting Movies

242

While shooting a movie, you can also

take a still photo by pressing the shutter

button completely.

Taking Still Photos during Movie Shooting

If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record

a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.



The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie

shooting will resu me auto matically when the L ive V iew imag e is displa yed.



The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.

Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below. Other

functions will be the same as for movie shooting.

* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.

Shooting Still Photos

Function Settings

Image-

Recording

Quality

As set in [z1: Image quality].

When the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the

aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480], the aspect

ratio wi ll be 4:3.

ISO Speed

• With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within ISO 100 -

ISO 6400.

• With manual exposure shooting: Se e “ISO Speed During Manual-

exposure Shooting” on page 238.

Exposure

Setting

• With autoexposure shoo ting: Automati cally-set shutter speed and

aperture (displayed when pressing the shutter button halfway).

• With manual exposure shooting: Manually-set shutter speed and

aperture.

AEB Canceled

Flash Flash off

Regardless of the drive mode setting, single shooting wil l take effect for

still photo shooting during movie shootin g.

The self-timer can be set before you st art shooting a movie. During

movie shooting, the camera will switch to single shooting.

243

k Shooting Movies

When you press the shutter button halfway to aut ofocus during movie

shooting, the follo wing phenomena may occur.

• Focus may become far off momentarily.

• The brightness of the recorded movie may change.

• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.

• The movie may record the lens operation noise.

• You cannot shoot still photos when focus is not achieved, such as when

the subject is moving.

244

Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here.

If you press the <

> button while the image is displayed on th e LCD

monitor, you can set any of the followin g:

AF method

Drive mode

Movie recording size

Digital zoom

Video snap shots

, White balance,

Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer , a nd

Miniature effect movie

In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold can be set.

1Press the <Q> button (7).

The settable functions will be

displayed.

[HDR Movie Shooting] is settable

only in Basic Zone modes (p.249).

2Select a function and set it.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select a

function.

The selected function and Feature

guide (p.73) will appear.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the

function.

To set the drive mode’s <q>, WB

correction/WB bracketing, or Picture

Style parameters, press the

button.

3Exit the setting.

Press <0> to finalize the setting and

return to movie shooting.

You can also select <2> to return to

movie shooting.

Shooting Function Settings

Q Quick Control

245

With [Z2: Movie rec. size], you can

set the movie recording size (image size,

frame rate, and compression method)

and other functions.

Image Size

L 1920x1080

Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is

16:9.

w 1280x720

High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.

x 640x480

Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect ratio is 4:3.

Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)

D 29.97 fps/F 59.94 fps

For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America, Japan,

South Korea, Mexico, etc.).

C 25.00 fps/E 50.00 fps

For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,

Australia, etc.).

B 23.98 fps

Mainly for motion pictures.

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen switches

depending on whether [53: Vi deo system] is set to [NTSC] or [PAL].

B (23.98 fps) can be selected only when [NTSC] is set.

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

246

Compression Method

Standard

Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.

Light (v)

The movie is recorded at a low bit rate for playback on various

devices, resulting in a smaller file size than with [Standard].

Therefore, you can shoot longer than with [Standard].

If you change the [53: Video system] setting, set the movie recording size

again.

247

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute (Approx.)

Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB

Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting

without interruption.

During movie shoo ting, ap prox. 30 se c. befor e the movie reac hes the

4 GB file size, the elapse d shooting time displayed in the movie

shooting screen will st art blinking. If you kee p shooting until the movie

file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created au tomatically

and the elap sed shooting time or time code will stop blinking.

When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file

individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in

consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next

movie to be played back.

Movie Shooting Time Limit

The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If

the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting

will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by

pressing the <A> button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.)

Movie Re co rd ing Size Total Recording Time on Card File Size

4 GB 8 GB

16 GB

[1920x

1080]

DCB

Standard

17 min. 35 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 216 MB/min.

Light

43 min. 1 hr. 26 min. 2 hr. 53 min. 87 MB/min.

[1280x

720]

Standard

20 min. 40 min. 1 hr. 21 min. 187 MB/min.

Light

2 hr. 5 min. 4 hr. 10 min. 8 hr. 20 min. 30 MB/min.

[640x

480]

Standard

57 min. 1 hr. 55 min. 3 hr. 50 min. 66 MB/min.

Light

2 hr. 43 min. 5 hr. 26 min. 10 hr. 53 min. 23 MB/min.

HDR Movie Shooting [

1280x720

] 40 min. 1 hr. 20 min. 2 hr. 40 min. 94 MB/min.

An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting

to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table above (p.268).

248

When the movie size is [1920x1080] (Full HD), you can shoot with an

approx. 3x to 10x digital zoom.

1Select [Dig ital zoom].

Under the [Z2] tab, select [Digital

zoom], then press <0>.

2Select [Approx. 3-10x zoom].

Select [Approx. 3-10x zoom], then

press <0>.

Press the <M> button to exit the

menu and return to movie shooting.

3Use digital zoom.

Press the <W> <X> keys.

The digital zoom bar will appear.

Press the <W> key to zoom in or

press the <X> key to zoom out.

When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus with

[FlexiZone - Single] (fixed at center).

To cancel digital zoom, set [Disable]

in step 2.

3 Using Movie Digital Zoom

Use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

When movie digital zoom is set, th e maximum ISO speed will be ISO

6400 (it cannot be expanded to H: equivalent to ISO 12800). Also,

magnified view is not possible.

Since movie digital zoom processes the image digitally, the image will

look rougher at higher magnificat ions. Noise, light spots, etc., may also

become noticeable.

When movie digital zoom is set, the scene icon will not be di splayed.

Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page

224.

Still photo shooting is not possible.

249

You can shoot movies by reducing the clipped highlight details of bright

areas even in high-contrast scenes. This function is settable in Basic

Zone modes.

1Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone

mode.

2Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

3Select [4].

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[4] (HDR Movie Shooting) on the

screen’s right side.

4Select [Enabl e].

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

[Enable], then press <0>.

For recording time and file sizes, see

the table on page 247.

Shooting HDR Movies

250

The recording size is fixed at [1280x720 29.9 7fps (S tandard)] (it is fixed

at [1280x720 25.00fps (Standard)] if [53: Video system] is set to

[PAL]). If [HDR Movie Shooting: Disable] is set, the recording size will

revert to the original setting.

Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, a part of the

movie may be distorted. During shooting while handholding the camera,

the distortion caused by camera shake may be no ticeable. Using a tr ipod

is recommended.

Note that even if a tripod is used for shooting, afterimages may be

noticeable or noise may look increased during the HDR movie is played

back frame-by-frame or in slo w -motion compared to when it is played

back normally.

HDR movie shooting cannot be set i f movie digital zoom, video sna pshot,

or Miniature ef fect movie is set.

Still photo shooting is not possible.

251

You can shoot movies having a Miniature (diorama) effect. Select the

playback speed and shoot.

1Press the <Q> button.

The Quick Control screen will appear.

2Select [T].

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[T] (Miniature effect movie) on the

right of the screen.

3Select the playback spe ed.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

[5x], [10x], or [20x], then press <0>.

4Position the white frame over th e

part you want to look sharp.

Press the <W> <X> keys to move the

white frame over the part you want to

look sharp.

To switch the white frame’s vertical /

horizontal orientation, press the

button (or tap [T] on the screen’s

lower right).

Shooting Miniature Effect Movies

252

5Shoot the movie.

The AF method will be FlexiZone -

Single to focus on the center of the

white frame.

The white frame is not displayed

while you shoot.

Playback Speed and Length (for 1-minute movie)

Speed Playback Length

O (5x) Approx. 12 sec.

P (10x) Approx. 6 sec.

Q (20x) Approx. 3 sec.

Sound will not be recorded.

With Miniature effect movies, Movie Servo AF will not work.

Miniature effect movie cannot be set if movie digital zoom, video

snapshot, HDR movie shooting, 1+73, 1, or white balance

bracketing is set.

You cannot take still photos while shooting a Miniature effect movie.

Miniature ef fect movies whose playback time is shorter than 1 sec.

cannot be edited (p.306).

253

You can shoot a series of short movie clips lasting approx. 2 sec., 4

sec., or 8 sec. called video snapshots. The video snapshots can be

joined together into a single movie called a video snapshot album. You

can thereby show quick highlights of a trip or event.

A video snapshot album can also be played back together with

background music (p.260, 311).

1Select [Video snapshot].

Under the [Z2] tab, select [Video

snapshot], then press <0>.

2Select [Enabl e].

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration

Video Snapshot Album Concept

Video snapshot album

Video

snapshot 1 Video

snapshot 2 Video

snapshot x

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

254

3Select [Alb um settings].

Select [Album settings], then press

<0>.

4Select [Create a new alb um].

Select [Create a new album], then

press <0>.

5Select the snapshot length.

Press <0> and use the <W> <X>

keys to select the snapshot’s length,

then press <0>.

6Select [O K].

Select [OK], then press <0>.

Press the <M> button to exit the

menu.

A blue bar will appear to indicate the

snapshot length.

Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot

Album” (p.255).

Shooting duration

255

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

7Shoot the first video snapshot.

Press the <A> button, then shoot.

The blue bar indicating the shooting

duration will gradually decrease. After

the set shooting duration elapses, the

shooting stops automatically.

The confirmation screen will appear

(p.256-257).

8Save as a video snapshot album.

Select [J Save as album], then

press <0>.

The movie clip will be saved as the

video snapshot album’s first video

snapshot.

9Continue to shoot more vide o

snapshots.

Repeat step 7 to shoot the next video

snapshot.

Select [J Add to album], then press

<0>.

To create another video snapshot

album, select [W Save as a new

album].

Repeat step 9 as necessary.

Exit the vide o s na pshot shooting.

Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].

To return to normal movie

shooting, be sure to set [Disable].

Press the <M> button to exit the

menu, and return to the normal movie

shooting.

Creating a Video Snapshot Album

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

256

Options in Steps 8 and 9

Function Description

J Save as album

(Step 8) The movie clip will be saved as the video

snapshot album’s first video snapshot.

J Add to album

(Step 9)

The video snapshot just recorded will be

added to the albu m recorded immediately

before.

W Save as a n e w al b u m

(Step 9)

A new video snapshot album is created

and the movie clip is saved as the first

video snapshot. The new album will be a

differe nt file from the previously recorded

album.

1 Playback video snapshot

(Steps 8 and 9)

The video snapshot just recorded will be

played back. For playback operations,

see the table on the next page.

r Do not save to album

(Step 8)

r Delete without saving to album

(Step 9)

The video snapshot just recorded will be

erased instead of being saved to the

album. Select [OK] on the confirmation

dialog.

If you want to shoot another video snapshot

right after shoot ing one video snapshot, set

[Show confirm msg] to [Disable]. This

setting will allow you to immediately shoot the

next video snapshot without the confirmation

screen appearing after you shoot each time.

257

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

[Playback video snapshot] Operations in Steps 8 and 9

*With [Skip backward] and [Skip forward], the skipping length corresponds to

the number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., o r 8

sec.).

Function Playback Description

7 Play By pressing <0>, you can play back or pause the video

snapshot recorded immediately before.

5 First frame Displays the first scene of the album’ s first video snap shot.

P Skip backward* Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back

by a few seconds.

3 Previous frame Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is

displayed. If you hold down < 0>, it will rewind the movie.

6 Next frame Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-

frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the

movie.

O Skip forward* Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips

forward by a few seconds.

4 Last frame Displays the last scene o f the albu m’s last video snapshot.

Playback position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

9 Volume You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.304) volume by

turning the <6> dial.

32Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous

screen.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

258

1Select [Add to existing album].

Follow step 4 on page 254 to select

[Add to existing album], then press

<0>.

2Select an existing album.

Turn the <5> dial to select an

existing album, then press <0>.

Select [OK], then press <0>.

Certain video snapshot settings will

change to match the existing album’s

settings.

Press the <M> button to exit the

menu.

The video snapshot shooting screen

will appear.

3Shoot the video snapshot.

See “Creating a Video Snapshot

Album” (p.255) to shoot the video

snapshot.

Adding to an Existing Album

You cannot select an album shot with another camera.

259

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots

You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same dur ation

(approx. 2 sec. , 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).

Note that if you do any of the following while shoot ing video snap shots, a

new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.

• Changing the [Movie rec. size].

• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto]/[Manual] to [Disable]

or from [Disable] to [Auto]/[Manual].

• Updating the firmware.

You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.

The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.

Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during

playback may not be exact.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

260

You can play back a video snapshot album in the same way as a normal

movie (p.304).

1Play back the movie.

Press the <x> button to display an

image.

2Select the album.

In the single-image display, the

[st] icon displayed on the upper

left of the screen indicates a video

snapshot album.

Turn the <5> dial to select an

album.

3Play back the album.

Press <0>.

On the movie playback panel

displayed, select [7] (Play), then

press <0>.

Playing back an Album

Background Music

You can play background music when you play back albums, normal

movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.305, 308) . To play

background music, you must first copy the b ackground mu sic to the card

using EOS Utility (EOS software). For information on how to copy the

background music, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.422).

Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private

enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright ho lder.

261

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video

snapshots in the album.

1Select [X].

On the movie playback panel

displayed, select [X] (Edit), then

press <0>.

The editing screen will be displayed.

2Select an editing operation.

Select an editing option, then press

<0>.

Editing an Album

Function Description

T Move snapshot Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot

you want to move, then press <0>. Press the <Y>

<Z> keys to move the snapshot, then press <0>.

L Delete snapshot

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot

you want to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will

be displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing

<0> again will cancel the selection and [L] will

disappear.

7 Play snapshot Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot

you want to play, then press <0>.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

262

3Save the edited album.

Press the <M> button to return to

the Editing panel at the screen’s

bottom.

Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.

The save screen will appear.

To save it as a new album, select

[New file]. To save it and overwrite

the original album, select

[Overwrite], then press <0>.

If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be

available.

When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fully-

charged battery.

263

When you set the power switch to <k>,

the [Z1] and [Z2] tabs will show

functions dedicated to movie shooting.

AF method

The AF methods are the same as described on pages 218-225. You

can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone -

Single].

Movie Servo AF

During movie shooting, the camera focuses on the subject

continuously. The default setting is [Enable].

When [Enable] is set:

The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you

are not pressing the shutter button halfway.

Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery

power and shorten the total possible movie shooting time (p.247).

With certain lenses, the lens operation noise during focusing may

be recorded. If this happens, use an external microphone

(commercially available) to reduce lens operation noise in the

movie. Also, using certain STM lenses (for example, the EF-S18-

135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM) will reduce lens operation noise.

If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during

Movie Servo AF, first set the power switch to <1>.

3 Menu Function Settings

264

If you want to keep the focus at a specific point, or if you do not

want the lens operation noise to be recorded, you can temporarily

stop Movie Servo AF as follows. When you stop Movie Servo AF,

the AF point will turn gray. When you perform the same steps

below, Movie Servo AF will resume.

• Press the <D> button.

• Tap the [P] icon on the lower left of the screen.

• If [10: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [2: AF/AF lock, no AE

lock] in the [54: Custom Function s (C.Fn) ], you can pause the

Movie Servo AF while holding down the <A> button. When you

let go of the <A> button, Movie Servo AF will resume.

When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting

after pressing the <M> or <x> button, Movie Servo AF will

resume.

When [Disable] is set:

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult

• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.

• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page

224.

Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or in magnified view.

During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the

camera is moved vertically or horizonta lly (p annin g), the recorded movie

image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image

magnification).

265

3 Menu Function Settings

AF with shutter button during movie recording

While shooting a movie, you can also take a still photo by pressing

the shutter button completely. By default, AF operation is set to

[One-Shot AF].

When [One-Shot AF] is set:

• You can refocus and shoot a still photo by pressing the shutter

button halfway while shooting a movie.

• When shooting a still subject, you can perform shooting in

precise focus.

When [Disable] is set:

• You can immediately start shooting a still photo by pressing the

shutter button, even though focus is not achieved. This is

effective when you want to give priority to the shooting

opportunity rather than to focusing.

Grid display

With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines. You can

check horizontal or vertical tilt when shooting.

Metering timerK

You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

time).

Movie recording size

You can set the movie recording size (image size, frame rate, and

compression method). For details, see pages 245-247.

Digital zoom

You can use digital zoom for telephoto shooting. For details, see

page 248.

3 Menu Function Settings

266

Sound recording J

Normally, the built-in microphones will

record stereo sound. If a commercially-

available external stereo microphone

equipped with a mini plug (3.5 mm

diameter) is connected to the camera’s

external microphone IN terminal (p.26), it

will be given priority.

[Sound rec./Rec. level] options

[Auto] : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.

Auto level control will operate automatically in

response to the sound level.

[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-

recording level to one of 64 levels.

Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while

pressing the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust the sound-

recording level. Look at the peak hold indicator

(approx. 3 sec.), and adjust so that the level meter

sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (-12 dB)

mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the

sound will be distorted.

[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.

[Wind filter]

When set to [Auto], it reduces wind noise when there is wind

outdoors. This feature takes effect only with the built-in

microphones. When the wind filter function takes effect, low bass

sounds will also be reduced.

[Attenuator]

Even if you set [Sound recording] to [Auto] or [Manual] before

shooting, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud

sound. In such a case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended.

Level meter

267

3 Menu Function Settings

Video snapshots

You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 253.

In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will

be [On] or [Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adj usted

automatically ( sa me as with [Auto]), and the wind filter function will take

effect.

The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be

adjusted.

Both L and R record audio at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.

268

General Movie Shooting Cautions

White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons

If the camera’ s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie

shooting or under a high ambient tempe rature, a white < s> or red <E>

icon will appear.

The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will

deteriorate. It is recommended that you stop still photo shooting for a

while and allow the camera to cool down. Since movie image quality will

hardly be affe cted, you can still shoot movies.

The red <E> icon indicates th at movie shooting will so on be terminated

automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the

camera rest for a while.

Shooting a movie at a high temper ature for a prolonged period will cause

the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting,

always turn off the camera.

Recording and Image Quality



If the attached lens has an Image St abilizer and you set the Image St abilizer

(IS) switch to <

>, the Image S tabilizer will operate at all times even i f you

do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes

battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease

the number of possible shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image St abi lizer is

not necessary, it is recommended to set the IS switch to <

The camera’s built-in microphones will also pick up camera operation

noise. Use an external microphone (commercially available) to reduce

camera operation noise in the movie.

Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the

camera’s external microphone IN terminal.



If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, the movie

may freeze temporarily. In such cases, shoot movies with manual

exposure.

If there is a very bright light so urce in the image, the bright area may

appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost

exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.

In low light, noise or irregular col ors may app ear in the image. The movie

will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.

If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may

deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support

MP4 format).

269

General Movie Shooting Cautions

Recording and Image Quality

If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level

indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie

shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been

written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer

memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will

climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting

will stop automatically.

If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either

not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.

First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.

Still Photo Shooting During Movie Shooting

Regarding the image quality of still phot os, see “Image Quality” on page

230.

Playback and TV Connection

If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.312-315) and shoot a movie,

the TV set will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the

sound will be properly recorded.

Indicator

Restrictions on MP4-format Movies

Note that generally the following restrictions apply to MP4-format movies.

Sound will not be recorded on approx. the last two frames.

When you play back movies on Wind ows, images and sound may

become slightly out of synchronization.

271

Handy Features

Disabling the Beeper (p.272)

Card Reminder (p.272)

Setting the Image Review Time (p.273)

Setting the Auto Power-off Time (p.273)

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.274)

Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.275)

File Numbering Methods (p.277)

Setting Copyright Information (p.279)

Auto Rotation of Vertical Images (p.281)

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings (p.282)

Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically

(p.285)

Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color (p.285)

Automatic Sensor Cleaning (p.286)

Appending Dust Delete Data (p.287)

Manual Sensor Cleaning (p.289)

272

You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved

during self-timer shooting and touch screen operations.

Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep], then

press <0>. Select [Disable], then press

<0>.

To silence the beeper only during touch

screen operations, select [Touch to y].

This setting prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.

Under the [z1] tab, select [Release

shutter without card], then press <0>.

Select [Disable], then press <0>.

If there is no card inserted in the camera

and you press the shutter button, “Card”

will be displayed in the viewfinder and on

the LCD panel, and you cannot release

the shutter.

Handy Features

3 Disabling the Beeper

3 Card Reminder

273

Handy Features

You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor just

after shooting. If [Off] is set, the image will not be displayed just after

shooting. If [Hold] is set, the image review will be displayed up until the

[Auto power off] time has elapsed.

During image review, if you operate any camera controls such as

pressing the shutter button halfway, the image review will end.

Under the [z1] tab, select [Image

review], then press <0>. Select the

desired setting, then press <0>.

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after the set

time of idle operation elapses. You can set this auto power-off time.

When the camera is turned off due to auto power off, you can turn it on

again by pressing the shutter button, etc.

If [Disable] is set, either turn off the camera or press the

button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery power.

Even when [Disable] is set, if the camera is not used for 30 min.,

the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD

monitor again, press the button.

Under the [52] tab, select [Auto power

off], then press <0>. Select the desired

setting, then press <0>.

3 Setting the Image Review Time

3 Setting the Auto Power-off Time

Handy Features

274

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to

read.

Under the [52] tab, select [LCD

brightness], then press <0>. Press th e

<Y> <Z> keys to adjust the brightness

on the adjustment screen, then press

<0>.

When checking the exposure of an

image, set the LCD monitor brightness to

4 and prevent the ambient light from

affecting the image.

3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness

275

Handy Features

You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images

are to be saved.

This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for

saving captured images.

Creating a Folder

1Select [Select folder].

Under the [51] tab, select [Select

folder], then press <0>.

2Select [Create folder].

Select [Create folder], then press

<0>.

3Create a new folder.

Select [OK], then press <0>.

A new folder with the folder number

increased by one is created.

3 Creating and Selecting a Folder

Handy Features

276

Selecting a Folder

With the folder selection screen

displayed, select a folder and press

<0>.

The folder where the captured

images will be saved is selected.

Subsequent captured images will be

recorded into the selected folder.

Number of images in folder

Folder name

Lowest file number

Highest file number

Folders

As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits

(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can

contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder

becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is

created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.278) is executed, a new

folder will be created automatical l y. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can

be created.

Creating Folders with a Computer

With the card open o n the screen, creat e a new fol der named “DCIM”. Open

the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and

organize your images. The folder name must follow the format

“100ABC_D”. The first th ree digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.

The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case

letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be

used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit

folder number (for example, “10 0ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the last

five characters in each name are different.

277

Handy Features

The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the

images are taken, then saved in a folder. You can change how the file

number is assigned.

The file number will appear on your computer in this format:

IMG_0001.JPG.

Under the [51] tab, select [File

numbering], then press <0>. The

available settings are described below.

Select the option, then press <0>.

[Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence even

after you replace the card or create a folder.

Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file

numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient

when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001

to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on

your computer.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images

recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may

continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card

or in the folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is

recommended that you use a newly-formatted card each time.

3 File Numbering Methods

File numbering after

replacing the card

Next sequential file number

File numbering after

creating a folder

Card-1Card-1 Card-2

0051 0052 0051 0052

100 101

Handy Features

278

[Auto reset]: The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time

the card is replaced or a new folder is created.

When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering

restarts from 0001 for the new images saved. This is convenient if

you want to organize images by cards or folders.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images

recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may

continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card

or in the folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering

starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.

[Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or

to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.

When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created

automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder

starts from 0001.

This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images

taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the

manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.

(There will be no manual reset confirmation dialog.)

File numbering after

replacing the card

File numbering is reset

File numbering after

creating a folder

Card-1Card-1 Card-2

0051 0001 0051 0001

100 101

If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible

even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a

message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.

For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will st art with “IMG_”. Movie

file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG

images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “.MP4” for movies.

279

Handy Features

When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the

image as Exif information.

1Select [Copyright information].

Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright

information], then press <0>.

2Select the option to be set.

Select [Enter author’s name] or

[Enter copyright details], then press

<0>.

The text entry screen will appear.

Select [Display copyright info.] to

check the copyright information

currently set.

Select [Delete copyright

information] to delete the copyright

information currently set.

3Enter text.

See “Text Entry Procedure” on the

next page and enter the copyright

information.

Enter up to 63 alphanumeric

characters and symbols.

4Exit the setting.

After entering the text, press the

<M> button to exit.

On the confirmation dialog, select

[OK], then press <0>.

3 Setting Copyright InformationK

Handy Features

280

Text Entry Procedure

Changing the Entry Area:

Press the <Q> button to toggle

between the top and bottom entry

areas.

Moving the Cursor:

Press the <Y> <Z> keys in the top

area to move the cursor.

Entering Text:

In the bottom area, press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys to select

a character, then press <0> to enter it.

Changing the Entry Mode:*

Select [E] at the bottom right of the bottom entry area. Each

time you press <0>, the entry mode will change as follows: Lower

case 9 Numerals / Symbols 1 9 Numerals / Symbols 2 9 Upper

case.

* When [Touch control: Disable] is set, you can enter all characters on on e

screen.

Deleting a Character:

Press the <L> button to delete one character.

Finishing the Text Entry:

Press the <M> button, check the text, select [OK], then press

<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.

Canceling the Text Entry:

Press the button, check the text, select [OK], then press

<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.

You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS

software, p.420).

281

Handy Features

Vertical images are rotated automatically so they

are displayed ve rtically on the camera’s LCD

monitor and on the computer instea d of horizonta lly.

You can change the setting for this fe ature.

Under the [51] tab, select [Auto rotate],

then press <0>. The available settings

are described below. Select the option,

then press <0>.

[OnzD]:

The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback

on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.

[OnD] : The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the

computer.

[Off] : The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

The vertical image is not rotated during the image review just

after shooting.

Press t he <

> button and the image playback will display the rotated image.

[OnzD]

is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.

Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while [

Auto

rotate

] was set to [

Off

]. If the vertical image is taken while the camera

is pointed up or down, the image may not be rotated automatically for

playback. In suc h a case, see “Rotati ng the Image” on page 297.

On the camera’s LCD monitor, I want to rotate an image

captured when [OnD] had been set.

Set [OnzD], then play back the image. It will be rotated.

The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen.

The software used is not compatible with image rotation. Use EOS

software instead.

3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images

FAQ

Handy Features

282

The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be

reverted to their defaults. This option is available in Creative Zone

modes.

1Select [Clear settings].

Under the [54] tab, select [Clear

settings], then pre ss <0>.

2Select [Clear all camera settings].

Select [Clear all camera settings],

then press <0>.

3Select [OK].

Select [OK], then press <0>.

Setting [Clear all camera settings]

will reset the camera to the default

settings as shown on pages 283-284.

Clearing all camera settings

After the procedure above, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]

in [54: Clear settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings

(p.350).

3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsK

FAQ

283

Handy Features

Shooting Function Settings Image Recording Settings

<8> mode C (Kids) Image quality 73

AF operation One-Shot AF Picture Style Auto

AF area selection

mode

Auto

selectio n: 19 pt

Auto Lighting

Optimizer Standard

Drive mode u (Single

shooting) Peripheral

illumination

correction

Enable /

Correction

data retained

Metering mode q (Evaluative

metering)

ISO speed AUTO (Auto) Chromatic

aberration

correction

Enable /

Correction

data retained

ISO Auto Maximum 6400

Exposure

compensation /

AEB Canceled Distortion

correction

Disable /

Correction

data retained

Flash exposure

compensation 0 (Zero)

Red-eye reduction Disable Color space sRGB

Anti-flicker

shooting Disable White balance Q (Auto)

Aspect ratio 3 : 2 Custom White

Balance Canceled

Viewfinder display

Display only

flicker detection

White balance

correction Canceled

White balance

bracketing Canceled

Custom Functions Unchanged Long exposure

noise reduction Disable

Flash control

Flash firing Enable High ISO speed

noise reduction Standard

E-TTL II flash

metering Evaluative flash

metering File numbering Continuous

Flash sync.

speed in Av mode Auto Auto cleaning Enable

Dust Delete Data Erase

Handy Features

284

Camera Settings Live View Shooting Settings

Auto power off 30 sec. Live View

shooting Enable

Beep Enable AF method u+Tracking

Release shutter

without card Enable Continuous AF Enable

Image review 2 sec. Touch Shutter Disable

AF point display Disable Grid display Off

Histogram display Brightness Metering timer 8 sec.

Image jump with

6e (10 images)

Auto rotate OnzDMovie Shooting Settings

LCD brightness AF method u+Tracking

LCD auto off Enable Movie Servo AF Enable

Date/Time/Zone Unchanged AF with shutter

button during

movie recording One-Shot AF

Language Unchanged

Video system Unchanged Grid display Off

B button display

options All items

selected Metering timer 8 sec.

Movie recording

size

NTSC:

LD (Standard)

PAL:

LC (Standard)

Screen color 1

Feature guide Enable

Touch control Standard

Unchanged Digital zoom Disable

Control over HDMI Disable Sound recording Auto

Eye-Fi transmission Disable Video snapshot Disable

My Menu settings Unchanged

Display from My Menu

Disable

Wi-Fi/NFC

Disable

Wi-F i function

Unchanged

For Wi-Fi/NFC settings, refer to the Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instr uction Manual.

285

Handy Features

You can prevent the display-off sensor from turning off the LCD monitor

when your eye approaches the viewfinder.

Under the [52] tab, select [LCD auto

off], then press <0>. Select [Disable],

then press <0>.

You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen.

Under the [53] tab, select [Screen

color], then press <0>. Select the

desired color, then press <0>.

When you exit the menu, the shooting

settings screen based in the selected

color will be displayed.

Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically

3 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color

When Angle Finder C (sold sep arately) is at tached to the viewfin der, set it to

[Disable]. If [Enable] is set, the LCD monitor may remain off.

286

Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self

Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on

the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this

operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning

manually, or disable it.

1Select [Sensor cleaning].

Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor

cleaning], then press <0>.

2Select [Clean nowf].

Select [Clean nowf], then press

<0>.

Select [OK], then press <0>.

The screen will indicate that the

sensor is being cleaned. (A small

sound may be heard.) Although there

will be a shutter sound, no picture is

taken.

In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].

The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the

power switch to <1> or <2>.

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Cleaning the Sensor Now

Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning

For best results, perform the sensor cleanin g with the camera placed

upright and stab le on a table or other flat surface.

Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.

Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]

option remains disabled temporarily.

287

Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust

that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust

still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for

erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital

Photo Professional (EOS software, p.420) to erase the dust spots

automatically.

Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.

Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.

Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity

(u). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to face

towards you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

1Select [Dust Delete Data].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust

Delete Data], then press <0>.

2Select [OK].

Select [OK] and press <0>. After

the automatic self-cleaning of the

sensor is performed, a message will

appear. Although there will be a

shutter sound during the cleaning, no

picture is taken.

3 Appending Dust Delete DataK

Preparation

Obtaining the Dust Delete Data

3 Appending Dust Delete DataK

288

3Shoot a solid-white object.

At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.

- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a

patternless, solid-white object and

take a picture.



The picture will be taken in aperture-

priority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.

Since the image will not be saved, the

data can still be obtained even if there

is no card in the camera.



When the picture is taken, the camera

will start collecting the Dust Delete

Data. When the Dust Delete Data is

obtained, a message will appear.

Select [

] and the menu will

reappear.



If the data is not obta ined successfully,

an error message will appear. Follow

the “Preparation” procedure on the

preceding page, then select [

]. Take

the picture again.

After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG

and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is

recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.

For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to

erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction

Manual (p.422).

The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly

affects the image file size.

Dust Delete Data

Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the

object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and

affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with EOS software.

289

Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can

be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before

cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.

The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be

cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is

recommended.

1Select [Sensor cleaning].

Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor

cleaning], then press <0>.

2Select [Clean manually].

Select [Clean manually], then press

<0>.

3Select [OK].

Select [OK], then press <0>.

In a moment, the reflex mirror will

lockup and the shutter will open.

“CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.

4Clean the sensor.

5End the cleani ng.

Set the power switch to <2>.

3 Manual Sensor CleaningK

If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.

For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18 (sold separately) is

recommended.

3 Manual Sensor CleaningK

290

While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the

power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and

image sensor may get damaged.

• Setting the power switch to <2>.

• Removing or inserting the battery.

The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the se nsor

with care.

Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the

sensor.

Do not insert the blower ti p i nside the camera beyond the lens mount. If

the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or

reflex mirror may get damaged.

Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowin g for ce

can damage the sensor, or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor and

scratch it.

If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper

will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.

If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the

sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

291

Image Playback

This chapter explains function s related to viewing

photos and movies, with more advanced uses than in

Chapter 2 “Basic Shooting and Image Playback”. Here

you will find explanations of how to play back and erase

photos and movies with the camera and view them on a

TV set.

Images shot and saved with another device

The camera may not be able to properly display imag es captured

with a dif ferent camera, edited with a comput er , or t hat have had their

file names changed.

292

Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or

100 images on one screen.

1Play back the image.

When y ou press the <x> button, the

last image captured will be displayed.

2Switch to the index display.

Press the button.

The 4-image index display will

appear. The selected image is

highlighted with an orange frame.

Pressing the button will

switch the display as follows: 9

images 9 36 images 9 100 images.

Pressing the button will switch

the display as follows: 100 images 9

36 images 9 9 images 9 4 images

9 1 image.

3Select an image.

Turn the <5> dial to move the

orange frame and select the image.

You can also press the <W> <X> or

<Y> <Z> keys to select the image.

Turning the <6> dial will display

image(s) on the next or previous

screen.

Press <0> in the index display to

display the selected image in the

single-image display.

x Searching for Images Quickly

Displaying Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)



293

x Searching for Images Quickly

In the single-image display , you can turn the <6> dial to jump through

the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.

1Select [Image jump w/6].

Under the [x2] tab, select [Image

jump w/6], then press <0>.

2Select the jump method.

Turn the <5> dial to select the jump

method, then press <0>.

d: Display images one by one

e: Jump 10 images

f: Jump 100 images

g: Display by date

h: Display by folder

i: Display movies only

j: Display stills only

k: Display by image rating (p.298)

Turn the <6> dial to select.

3Browse by jumping.

Press the <x> button to play back

images.

In the single-image display, turn the

<6> dial.

You can browse images with the

method that was set.

I Jumping through Images (Ju mp Display)

Playback position

Jump method

To search images by shooting date, select [Date].

To search images by folder, select [Folder].

If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or

[Stills] to display only one or the other.

If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the

images with the <6> dial.

294

You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD

monitor.

1Magnify the im age.

Press the button during image

playback.

The image will be magnified.

If you hold down the button, the

image will be magnified until it

reaches the maximum magnification.

Press the button to reduce

the magnification. If you hold down

the button, the magnification will be

reduced to the single-image display.

2Scroll around the image.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to scroll the magnified image in

the direction pressed.

To exit magnified view, press the

<x> button and the single-image

display will reappear.

u/y Magnified View

Magnified area position

In magnified view, you can turn the <5> dial to view another image at

the same magnification.

The image cannot be magnified during the image review just after

shooting.

A movie cannot be magnified.

295

The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your

fingers for various playback operations. First, press the <x> button

to play back images.

Swipe with one finger.

With single-image display, touch the

LCD monitor with one finger. You

can browse to the next or previous

image by swiping your finger to the

left or right.

Swipe to the left to see the next

(newer) image, or swipe to the right to

see the previous (older) image.

With index display, also touch the

LCD monitor with one fing er. You

can browse to the next or previous

screen by swiping your finger up or

down.

Swipe up to see the next (newer)

images or swipe down to see the

previous (older) images.

When you select an image, the

orange frame will appear. Tap on the

image again to display it as a single

image.

Swipe with two fingers.

Touch the LCD monitor with two fingers .

When you swipe two fingers to the left or

right, you can jump through images with

the method set in [Image jump w/6]

under the [x2] tab.

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen

Browsing Images

Jumping through Images (Jump Display)

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen

296

Pinch two finge rs.

Touch the screen with two fingers spread

apart, and pinch your fingers together on

the screen.

Each time you pinch your fingers, the

single-image display will change to

the index display.

When you select an image, the

orange frame will appear. Tap on the

image again to display it as a single

image.

Spread two fingers apart.

Touch the screen with two fingers

together, then spread your fingers apart

on the screen.

As you spread your fingers, the

image will be magnified.

The image can be magnified up to

approx. 10x.

You can scroll around the image by

dragging your fingers.

To reduce the image, pinch your

fingers together on the screen.

Tapping on the [2] icon will return to

the single-image display.

Reducing Image (Index Display)

Magnifying Image

Touch screen operations on the camera’s LCD monitor are also possible

while playing back images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.312-

315).

297

You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.

1Select [Rotate image].

Under the [x1] tab, select [Rotate

image], then press <0>.

2Select an image.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image to be rotated.

You can also select an image in the

index display (p.292).

3Rotate the image.

Each time you press <0>, the

image will rotate clockwise as follows:

90° 9 270° 9 0°.

To rotate another image, repeat steps

2 and 3.

To exit and return to the menu, press

the <M> button.

b Rotating the Image

If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.281) before taking vertical

shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.

If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during

image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].

A movie cannot be rotated.

298

You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of five rating

marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.

1Select [Rating].

Under the [x2] tab, select [Rating],

then press <0>.

2Select an image.

T urn the <5> dial to select an image

or movie to be rated, then press

<0>.

By pressing the button, you

can select images from a three-image

display. To return to the single-image

display, press the button.

3Rate the image.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select a

rating.

When you select a rating for the

image, the number beside the set

rating will increase by one.

To rate another image, repeat steps 2

and 3.

To return to the menu, press the

<M> button.

3 Setting Ratings

299

3 Setting Ratings

A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are

more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.

Taking Advantage of Ratings

With [x2: Image jump w/ 6], you ca n display only imag es having the

specifie d r at i ng .

With [x2: Slide show], you can play back only images having the

specifie d r at i ng .

With Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.420), you can select

only images with a specific rating (still photos only).

With Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Win dows 7, etc., you can see each file’s

rating as part of the f ile information display or in the provided image

viewer (still photos only).

300

During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following:

[J: Protect images, b: Rotate image, 9: Rating, U: Creative

filters, S: Resize (JPEG images only), N: Cropping, K: AF point

display, e: Image jump w/6, k: Wi-Fi function*].

For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.

* Not selectable if [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Disable].

1Press the <Q> button.

During image playback, press the

<Q> button.

The Quick Control options will

appear.

2Select a function and set it.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select a

function.

The name and current setting of the

selected function are displayed at the

bottom of the screen.



Set it by pressing the <

> <

> keys.

When setting the Creative filters

(p.326), Resize (p.329), Cropping

(p.331), or Wi-Fi function, also press

<0> to finalize the setting.

Image jump w/6: Set the Rating

(p.298) by pressing the

button.

To cancel, press the <M> button.

3Exit the setting.

Press the <Q> button to exit the

Quick Control screen.

Q Quick Control for Playback

301

Q Quick Control for Playback

To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rot ate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]

is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to

the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.

Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the

single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing

the <Q> button again will retu rn to the index display.

For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may

be restricted.

302

You can play back movies in the following three ways:

Use the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold

separately) or stereo AV cable AVC-

DC400ST (sold separately) to connect

the camera to a TV set. Then you can

play back captured movies and still

photos on the TV set.

If you have a High-Definition TV set and

connect your camera with an HDMI

cable, you can watch Full High-Definition

(Full HD: 1920x1080) and High-

Definition (HD: 1280x720) movies with

higher image quality.

You can play back movies on the

camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit

out the movie’s first and last scenes, and

play back the still photos and movies on

the card in an automatic slide show.

k Enjoying Movies

Playback on a TV Set (p.312-315)

Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.304-311)

Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera

cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.

Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB

cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.

If the playback devi ce is not co mp atible with MP4 files, the movie canno t

be played back.

A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to t he card or played

back with the camera.

303

k Enjoying Movies

To play back or edit a movie, use pre-

installed or general-purpose software,

compatible with the movie’s recording

format.

Playback and Editing with a Computer

If you want to play back or edit a movie with commercially-available

software, us e software compatible with MP4-format movies. For details on

commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.

304

1Play back the image.

Press the <x> button to display an

image.

2Select a movie.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

movie to be played back.



In the single-image display, the

> icon displayed on the upper

left of the screen indicates a movie. If

the movie is a video snapshot,

> will be displayed.

In the index display, perforations at

the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a

movie. As movies cannot be played

back from the index display, press

<0> to switch to the single-image

display.

3In the single-image display , press

<0>.

The movie playback panel will appear

at the bottom of the screen.

4Play back the movie.

Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.

The movie will start playing back.

You can pause the movie playback by

pressing <0>.

You can adjust the sound volume by

turning the <6> dial even during

movie playback.

For more details on the playback

procedure, see the next page.

k Playing Back Movies

Speaker

The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with ano th er ca mera.

305

k Playing Back Movies

Movie Playback Panel

* When background music is set, the movie sound will not be played back.

Operation Playback Description

7 Play Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.

8 Slow motion Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <Y> <Z>

keys. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right

of the screen.

5 First frame Displays the movie’s first frame.

3 Previous

frame Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is di splayed.

If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.

6 Next frame Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-

frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.

4 Last frame Displays the movie’s last frame.

F Background

music* Plays back a movie with the selected background music

(p.311).

X Edit Displays the editing screen (p.306).

Playback position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

9 Volume Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in

speaker (p.304).

32Press the <M> button to return to the single-image

display.



With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, the continuous playback time at

room temperature (23°C / 73°F) is approx. 2 hr. 20 min.

If you connect the camer a to a TV set to play ba ck a movi e (p. 312 , 3 15),

adjust the sound volume with t he TV set . (Turning the <6> dial will not

change the sound volume.)

If you take a still photo while you are shooting the movie, the still photo

will be displayed for approx. 1 sec. durin g the movie playback.

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

306

Tap [

] on the center of the screen.

The movie will start playing back.

To display the movie playback panel,

tap <s1> on the upper left of the

screen.

To pause the movie while it is playing

back, tap on the screen. The movie

playback panel will also appear.

Playback with the Touch Screen

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.

increments.

1On the movie playback screen,

select [X].

The movie editing panel will be

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

2Specify the part to be edited out.

Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or

[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to see the

previous or next frames. Holding

down the key will fast forward or fast

rewind the frames. Turn the <5> dial

for frame-by-frame playback.

After deciding which part to edit out,

press <0>. The portion highlighted

in gray on the top of the screen will

remain.

307

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

3Check the edited movie.

Select [7] and press <0> to play

back the edited movie.

To change the editing, go back to step

To cancel the editing, press the

<M> button, then select [OK] on

the confirmation dialog.

4Save the edited movie.

Select [W], then press <0>.

The save screen will appear.

To save it as a new movie, select

[New file]. To save it and overwrite

the original movie file, select

[Overwrite], then press <0>.

On the confirmation dialog, select

[OK], then press <0> to save the

edited movie and return to the movie

playback screen.

Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position

indicated by [Z] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the

movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.

If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be

available.

When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fully-

charged battery.

308

You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.

1Select [Slide show].

Under the [x2] tab, select [Slide

show], then press <0>.

2Select the images to be played

back.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the desired option, then press <0>.

All images/Movies/Stills

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

one of the following: [OAll images]

[kMovies] [zStills]. Then press

<0>.

Date/Folder/Rating

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

one of the following: [iDate]

[nFolder] [9Rating].

When <zH> is highlighted,

press the button.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select an

option, then press <0>.

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Number of images

to be played back

[Date][Folder][Rating]

309

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

3Configure [Set up] as de sired.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[Set up], then press <0>.

Set the [Display time], [Repeat]

(repeated playback), [Transition

effect] (effect when changing

images), and [Background music]

for the still photos.

The background music selection

procedure is explained on page 311.

After selecting the settings, press the

<M> button.

Item Playback Description

OAll images All the still photos and movies on the card will be played

back.

iDate Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date

will be played back.

nFolder Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played

back.

kMovies Only the movies on the card will be played back.

zStills Only the still photos on the card will be played back.

9Rating Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will

be played back.

[Display time][Repeat]

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

310

4Start the slide show.

Press the <W><X> keys to select

[Start], then press <0>.

After [Loading image...] is displayed,

the slide show will start.

5Exit the slide show.

To exit the slide show and return to

the setting screen, press the <M>

button.

[Transition effect][Background music]

To pause the slide show , press <0>. During pause, [G] will be displayed

on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide

show. You can also pause the sli de show by tapping on the screen.

During auto playback, you can press the button to change the

still photo display format (p.107) .

During movie playback, you can adjust the so und volume by turning the

<6> dial.

During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view

another image.

During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.

The display time may vary de pending on the image.

To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 312.

311

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

After you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to copy background music to

the card, you can play background music together with the slide show.

1Select [Background music].

Set [Background music] to [On],

then press <0>.

If the card has no background music,

you cannot perform step 2.

2Select the background music.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the desired background music, then

press <0>. You can also select

multiple background music tracks.

3Play the background music.

To listen to a sample of the

background music, press the

button.

Press the <W> <X> keys to play

another background music track. To

stop listening to the background

music, press the button

again.

Adjust the sound volume by turning

the <6> dial.

To delete a background music track,

press the <W> <X> keys and select

the track, then press the <L> button.

Selecting the Background Music

At the time of purchase, the camera does not have background music. The

procedure to copy background music to a card is explained in the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual (p.422).

312

You can view still photos and movies on a TV set.

HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.

1Connect the HDMI cable to the

camera.

With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo

facing the front of the camera, insert it

into the <D> terminal.

2Connect the HDMI cable to the TV

set.

Connect the HDMI cable to the TV

set’s HDMI IN port.

3Turn on the TV set and switch the

TV set’s video inp ut to selec t the

connecte d po rt.

4Set the camera’s power switch to

<1>.

Viewing Images on a TV Set

Viewing on High-Definition (HD) TV Sets (Connected with HDMI)

If the video system format does not match the TV set’s, movies will not

be displayed properly. In such a case, switch to the proper video system

format with [53: Video system].

If [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot be connected to

a TV set. Set [Wi-Fi/NFC] to [Disable], then reconnect the camera to t he

TV set with an HDMI cable or stereo AV cable.

Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot

be adjusted with the camera.

Before connecting or di sconnecting the cable between the camera and

TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.

Depending on the TV set, p art of the image displayed may be cut off.

313

Viewing Images on a TV Set

5Press the <x> button.

The image will appear on the TV

screen. (Nothing will be displayed on

the camera’s LCD monitor.)

The images will automatically be

displayed at the optimum resolution

of the TV set.

By pressing the button, you

can change the display format.

To play back movies, see page 304.

If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible

with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback

operations.

* An HDMI-st andard f unction enabling HDMI devi ces to co ntrol e ach other so that

you can control them with one remote cont rol unit.

1 Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].

Under the [32] tab, select [Ctrl over

HDMI], then press <0>.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

Using HDMI CEC TV Sets

The images cannot be out put at the same time from b oth the < D>

and <q> terminals.

Do not connect any othe r device’ s outp ut to the camera’ s <D>

terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Certain TV sets may not be able to display the captured movies. In such

a case, use the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) to

connect to the TV set.

Viewing Images on a TV Set

314

2Connect the camera to a TV set.

Use an HDMI cable to connect the

camera to the TV set.



The TV set’s input will switch

automatically to the HDMI port

connected to the camera. If it does not

switch automatically, use the TV set’s

remot e c o ntro l to s ele c t the H D M I IN

port the cable is connected to.

3Press the camera’s <x> button.

An image will appear on the TV

screen and you can use the TV set’s

remote control to play back images.

4Select an image.

Point the remote control toward the

TV set and press the / button to

select an image.

Press the remote control’s Enter button.

The menu appears and you can

perform the playback operations

shown on the left.



Press the





button to select the

desired option, then press the Enter

button. For a slide show, press the

remote control’s





button to select

an option, then press the Enter button.

If you select [Return] and press the

Enter button, the menu will disappear

and you can use the / button to

select an image.

2: Return

a: 9-image index

1: Play movie

c: Slide show

B: Display shooting info

b: Rotate

Still photo playback menu

Movie playback menu

Some TV sets r equire yo u to f irst en able the HDMI CEC conne ct ion. For

details, refer to the TV set’ s instruction manual.

Certain TV set s, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not

operate properly. In such a case, set [32: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],

and use the camera to control the playback operation.

315

Viewing Images on a TV Set

Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) is required.

1Connect the AV cable to the

camera.

With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing

the back of the camera, insert it into

the <q> terminal.

2Connect the AV cable to the TV

set.

Connect the AV cable to the TV set’s

video IN terminal and audio IN

terminals.

3Turn on the TV set and switch the

TV’s video input to select the

connecte d po rt.

4Set the camera’s power switch to

<1>.

5Press the <x> button.

The image will appear on the TV

screen. (Nothing will be displayed on

the camera’s LCD monitor.)

To play back movies, see page 304.

Viewing on Non-HD TV Sets (Connected with AV Cable)

AUDIO

VIDEO

(Red)

(White)

(Yellow)

Do not use any AV cable other than the Stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST

(sold separately). Movies may not be displayed if you use a different cable.

316

You can set protections to prevent the precious images from being

erased accidentally.

1Select [Protect images].

Under the [31] tab, select [Protect

images], then press <0>.

2Select [Select images].

Select [Select images], then press

<0>.

An image will be displayed.

3Protect the image.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image to be protected, then press

<0>.

The image will be protected, and the

<K> icon will appear at the top of

the screen.

To cancel the image protection, press

<0> again. The <K> icon will

disappear.

To protect another image, repeat step

To return to the menu, press the

<M> button.

K Protecting Images

3 Protecting a Single Image

Image protect icon

317

K Protecting Images

You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When you select [All images in folder]

or [All images on card] in [31:

Protect images], all the images in the

folder or on the card will be protected.

To cancel the image protection, select

[Unprotect all images in folder] or

[Unprotect all images on card].

3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card

If you format the card (p.65), the protected images will also be erased.

Movies can also be protected.

Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase

function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the

protection.

If you erase all the images (p.319), only the protected images will

remain. This is convenient when you want to erase u nnecessary images

all at once.

318

You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or

erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.316) will not be erased.

Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure

you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent

important images from being erased accidentally, protect

them. Erasing a RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW

and JPEG images.

1Play back the image to be erased.

2Press the <L> button.

The Erase menu will appear.

3Erase the image.

Select [Erase], then press <0>. The

image displayed will be erased.

By appending checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can

erase multiple images at once.

1Select [Erase images].

Under the [31] tab, select [Erase

images], then press <0>.

L Erasing Im ages

Erasing a Single Image

Checkmarking <

> Images to Be Erase d in a Batch

319

L Erasing Images

2Select [Select and erase images].

Select [Select and erase images],

then press <0>.

An image will be displayed.

3Select the images to be erased.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image to be erased, then press <0>.

A checkmark <X> will be displayed

on the upper left of the screen.

By pressing the button, you

can select images from a three-image

display. To return to the single-image

display, press the button.

To select other images to be erased,

repeat step 3.

4Erase the image.

Press the <L> button.

Select [OK], then press <0>.

The selected images will be erased.

You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When

[31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on

card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.

3 Erasing All Imag es in a Folder or on a Card

To erase all images including protected images, format the card (p.65).

320

The information displayed varies depending on the shooting mode and

settings.

Basic information display

B: Shooting Information Display

Sample Information for Still Photos

Folder number -

File number

Rating

Playback number/

Total images

recorded

Protect images

Eye-Fi transfer completed

Battery level

Image-recording

quality

ISO speedExposure compensation

amount

Wi-Fi function

Shutter speed

Aperture

Wi-Fi/Eye-Fi card

transmission status

Highlight tone priority

321

B: Shooting Information Display

Shooting information display

•Detailed information

* When you shoot in [1+73] image quality, the 1 file size will be displayed.

* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be

displayed.

*<M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.

* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.

* If a Creative filter or resizing is applied to the image and then saved, will

be displaye d .

* For cropped images, and <N> will be displayed.

Exposure compensation amount

Shutter speed

Shooting mode

ISO speed

Shoo ting da te an d time

Image-recording quality

Histogram (Brightness/RGB)

White balance

White balance correction

Highlight tone priority

Metering mode

Flash exposure compensation

amount /

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Picture Style/Settings

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Scroll bar

Aperture

File size

If the image was taken by anot her camera, certai n shooting information may

not be displayed.

B: Shooting Information Display

322

•Lens/Histogram information

Histogram display

(Brightness)

Lens name

Focal length

Histogram display

(RGB)

•White balance information •Picture Style information

•Color space / Noise

reduction information •Lens aberration correction

information

•GPS information

If GPS information was not recorded for the image, the GPS information

screen will not be displayed.

Direction

Latitude

Elevation

Longitude

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

323

B: Shooting Information Display

* If manual exposure is used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed (when

set manually) will be displayed.

*The <t> icon will be displayed for video snapshots.

*The <t> icon will be displayed for HDR movies.

*The <c> icon will be displayed for Miniature effect movies.

AF Point Display

When [32: AF po int disp.] is set to [ Enable], the AF point that has

achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point

selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.

Sample Movie Information Display

Shooting mode

Movie file size

Shutter speed

Compression method

Movie recording size

Shooting time, Playback time

Playback

Aperture

Frame rate

B: Shooting Information Display

324

Highlight Alert

When the shooting information is displayed, any overexposed areas

of the image will blink. To obtain more image detail in the

overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a

negative amount and shoot again.

Histogram

The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and

overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color

saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [x2:

Histogram disp].

[Brightness] Display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution

of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis

indicates the brightness level (darker on the left

and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis

indicates how many pixels exist for each

brightness level. The more pixels there are toward

the left, the darker the image. The more pixels

there are toward the right, the brighter the image.

If there are too many pixels on the left, the shadow

deta il will be lo s t. If ther e are too many pixels on

the right, the h igh lig ht d e t a il will be lost. The

gradation in-between will be reproduced. By

checking the image and its brightness histogram,

you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.

[RGB] Display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary

color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The

horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left

and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many

pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are

toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels

there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are

too many pix e ls on the left, the respective colo r in fo rmation will be

lacking. If there are too many pixels on the rig ht, the c o lor will be too

saturated with no gradation. By checking the image’s RGB histogram,

you can see the color’s saturation and gradation condition, as well as

white balance inclination.

Sample Histograms

Dark image

Normal brightness

Bright image

325

Post-Processing

Images

After taking a picture, you can apply a Creative filter,

resize the JPEG image (reduce the numb er of pixels),

or crop the image.

The camera may not be able to process images taken with

another camera.

Post-processing images as describ ed in this chapter cannot be

performed when the camera is connected to a computer via

the <C> terminal.

326

You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a

new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,

Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.

1Select [Creative filters].

Under the [x1] tab, select [Creative

filters], then press <0>.

An image will be displayed.

2Select an image.

Select the image you want to apply a

filter to.

By pressing the button, you

can switch to the index display and

select an image.

3Select a filter.

When you press <0>, the types of

Creative filters will be displayed

(p.327).

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a

filter, then press <0>.

The image will be displayed with the

effects of the filter applied.

4Adjust the filter effect.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust

the filter effect, then press <0>.

For the Miniature effect, press the

<W> <X> keys and select the image

area (within the white frame) where

you want the image to look sharp,

then press <0>.

U Applying Creative Filters

327

U Applying Creative Filters

5Save the image.

Select [OK] to save the image.

Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [OK].

To apply a filter to another image,

repeat steps 2 to 5.

To return to the menu, press the

<M> button.

VGrainy B/W

Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the black-

and-white effect by adjusting the contrast.

WSoft focus

Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness

by adjusting the blur.

Creative Filter Characteristics

When shooting 1+73 or 1 image, the f ilter effect will be applied to

the 1 image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image.

If an aspect ratio was set for a 1 image and the filter effect is app lied

to it, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that is set.

Dust Delete Data (p.287) will not be appended to images with Fish-eye

effect applied.

U Applying Creative Filters

328

XFish-eye effect

Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type

distortion.

Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along

the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will

magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may

degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the filter

effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.

YArt bold effect

Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more

three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note

that the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered

with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant

noise.

ZWater painting effect

Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You

can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that

night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth

gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.

bToy camera effect

Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it

look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast

by adjusting the color tone.

cMiniature effect

Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks

sharp. In step 4, if you press the button (or tap on [T] at the

screen’s bottom), you can switch between the white frame’s vertical

and horizontal orientations.

329

You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it

as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/

b images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.

1Select [Resize].

Under the [31] tab, select [Resize],

then press <0>.

An image will be displayed.

2Select an image.

Select the image you want to resize.

By pressing the button, you

can switch to the index display and

select an image.

3Select the desired image size.

Press <0> to display the image

sizes.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the desired image size, then press

<0>.

4Save the image.

Select [OK] to save the resized

image.

Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [OK].

To resize another image, repeat steps

2 to 4.

To return to the menu, press the

<M> button.

S Resizing JPEG Images

Target sizes

S Resizing JPEG Images

330

Resize Options by Original Image Size

The image sizes displayed in step 3 on the preceding page, such as

[***M ****x****], have a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image sizes by aspect

ratios are shown in the table below.

The asterisked image-recording quality figures do not exactly match the

aspect ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.

Original Im age

Size Available Resize Settings

4a b c

3kkkk

4kkk

akk

Image Sizes

Image

Quality Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

43984x2656

(10.6 megapixels)

3552x2664

(9.5 megapixels) 3984x2240*

(8.9 megapixels) 2656x2656

(7.1 megapixels)

a2976x1984

(5.9 megapixels) 2656x1992

(5.3 megapixels) 2976x1680*

(5.0 megapixels) 1984x1984

(3.9 megapixels)

b1920x1280

(2.5 megapixels) 1696x1280*

(2.2 megapixels) 1920x1080

(2.1 megapixels) 1280x1280

(1.6 megapixels)

c720x480

(0.35 megapixels)

640x480

(0.31 megapixels)

720x408*

(0.29 megapixels)

480x480

(0.23 megapixels)

331

You can crop the image as desired and save it as a new image. JPEG

c and RAW images can not be cropped. The 1+73 image’s

JPEG image can be cropped.

1Select [Cropping].

Under the [x2] tab, select

[Cropping], then press <0>.

An image will be displayed.

2Select an image.

Select the image you want to crop.

By pressing the button, you

can switch to the index display and

select an image.

3Set the cropping frame size,

aspect ratio, position, and

orientation.

Press <0> to display the cropping

frame.

The image area within the cropping

frame will be cropped.

Changing the Cropping Frame Size

Press the or button.

The cropping frame size will change. The smaller the cropping

frame, the larger the image magnification will be.

Changing the Cropping Frame Aspect Ratio

Turn the <5> dial.

Cropping frame aspect ratio will change to [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], or

[1:1].

N Cropping JPEG Images

332

Moving the Cropping Frame

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys.

The cropping frame will move up, down, left, or right.

You can also touch the cropping frame and drag it to the desired

position.

Rotating the Cropping Frame Orie ntation

Press the button.

The cropping frame will switch between the vertical and horizontal

orientations. This enables you to create a vertical image from a

horizontal one, and vice versa.

4Display the cropped image in the

full view.

Press the <Q> button.

You can see the cropped image.

To return to the original display, press

the <Q> button again.

5Save the image.

Press <0> and select [OK] to save

the cropped image.

Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [OK].

To crop another image, repeat steps 2

to 5.

To return to the menu, press the

<M> button.

You cannot crop an image that ha s already been cropped.

You cannot apply a Creative filter or resizing to a cropped image.

333

Printing Images

Printing (p.334)

You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print

out the images on the card. The camera is compliant with

“wPictBridge”, which is the standard for direct printing.

You can also use a wireless LAN to send images to a

PictBridge (Wireless LAN) printer and print them. For

details, refer to the Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction Manual.

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.343)

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print

images recorded on the card according to your printing

instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,

etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the

print order to a photofinisher.

Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.347)

You can specify images on the card for printing in a

photobook.

334

The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the

camera while looking at the setting screens on camera’s LCD monitor.

1Set the camera’s power switch to

<2>.

2Set up the printer.

For details, refer to the printer’s

instruction manual.

3Connect the camera to the

printer.

Use the interface cable provided with

the camera.

Connect the cable to the camera’s

<C> terminal with the cable

plug’s <D> icon facing the front of

the camera.

To connect to the printer, refer to the

printer’s instruction manual.

4Turn on the printer.

5Set the camera’s power switch to

<1>.

Some printers may make a beeping

sound.

Preparing to Print

Connecting the Camera to a Printer

335

Preparing to Print

6Play back the image.

Press the <x> button.

The image will appear with the <w>

icon on the upper left of the screen to

indicate that the camera is connected

to a printer.

Before using the printer, make sure it has a PictBridge connection port.

Movies cannot be printed.

The camera cannot be u sed wit h print ers comp at ibl e only wit h CP Direct

or Bubble Jet Direct.

Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.

If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the

printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.342).

If any of the following shooting modes or functions is set, the camera

cannot be connected to a printer. Cancel all the relevant settings, then

reconnect the camera to the print er with an interface cable.

•<F> or <G> in <8> mode

• Multi Shot Noise Reduction

•[51: Wi-Fi/NFC] set to [Enable]

You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.

When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully

charged. With a fully-charged ba ttery p ack, you can print fo r approx. 2 h r.

Before disconnecting th e cable, first tu rn of f the camera and print er. Hold

the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.

For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18 (sold separately) to

power the camera is recommended.

336

The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the

printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the

printer’s instruction manual.

1Select the im age to be printed.

Check that the <w> icon is

displayed on the upper left of the LCD

monitor.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image to be printed.

Press <

The print setting screen will appear.

3Select [Paper settings].

Select [Paper settings], then press

<0>.

The paper settings screen will

appear.

w Printing

Printer-connected icon

Print setting screen

Sets the printing effects (p.338).

Sets the date or file number imprinting to on or off.

Sets the quantity to be printed.

Sets the print area (p.341).

Sets the paper size, type, and layout.

Returns to the screen in step 1.

Starts the printing.

* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file

number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.

The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.

337

w Printing

Select the size of the paper loaded in

the printer, then press <0>.

The paper type screen will appear.

Select the type of the paper loaded in

the printer, then press <0>.

The page layout screen will appear.

Select the page layout, then press

<0>.

The print setting screen will reappear.

*1: From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter

speed, aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance,

etc., will be imprinted.

*2:

After ordering the prints with “Dig ital Print Order Format ( DPOF)” (p.343), printing

by following “Direct Printing of Print- Ordered Images” (p.346) is recommended.

Q Setting the Paper Size

Y Setting the Paper Type

U Setting the Page Layout

Bordered Prints with white borders along the edges.

Borderless Prints with no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless

prints, the print will have borders.

BorderedcImprint s the shooting information*1 on the border on 9x13 cm or

larger prints .

xx-up Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.

20-upc

35-upp

Prints 20 or 35 images as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper*

• Imprints the shooting information*1 with [20-upc].

Default

The page layout varies depending on the printer model or its settings.

If the image’ s aspect ra tio is diffe rent from the pr inting p aper’s aspect ratio, the image

may be cropped significantly when you print it as a borderless print. If the image is

cropped, the print may look grainier due to the fewer number of pixels.

w Printing

338

4Set the printing effects (image

optimization).



Set them if necessary. If you do not need

to set any printing effects, go to step 5.

Contents displayed on the screen

vary depending on the printer.

Select the option, then press <0>.

Select the desired printing effect, then

press <0>.

If the <ze> icon is displayed

brightly, you can also adjust the

printing effects (p.340).

When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image

displaye d on the upper lef t of the screen. Note th at the p rinted im age m ay lo ok

slightly different from the d isplayed image , which is only an approximation.

This also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 340.

Printing Effect Description

EOn Prints with the print er’s standard colors. The image’s Exif data

is used to make automatic corrections.

EOff No automatic correction is applied.

EVivid Prints with high er saturation to produce more vivid blues and

greens.

ENR Image noise is reduced before printing.

0 B/W Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.

0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.

Warm tone

Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.

zNatural Prints the image in the act ual colors and contrast. No automatic

color adjustments are applied.

zNatural M Printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural” setting.

However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments than

with “N at ural”.

EDefault Printing dif fers dependi ng on the printer. For details, refe r to the

printer’s instruction manual.

If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO

speed (H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.

339

w Printing

5Set the date and file number

imprinting.

Set them if necessary.

Select , then press <0>.

Set the print settings as desired, then

press <0>.

6Set the number of copies.

Set it if necessary.

Select <R>, then press <0>.

Set the number of copies, then press

<0>.

7Start printing.

Select [Print], then press <0>.

The [Default] setting for printi ng effects and other options are the

printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer

to the printer’s instruction manual to fin d out what the [Default] settings

are.

Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may

take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].

If image tilt correction (p.341) is applied, it may take longer to print the

image.

To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select

[OK].

If you execute [54: Clear all camera settings] (p.282), all the settings

will revert to their defaults.

w Printing

340

In step 4 on page 338, select the printing

effect. When the <ze> icon is

displayed brightly, you can press the

button. You can then adjust the

printing effects. What can be adjusted or

what is displayed will depend on the

selection made in step 4.

Brightness

The image brightness can be adjusted.

Adjust levels

When you select [Manual], you can change

the histogram’s distribution and adjust the

image’s brightness and contrast.

With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press

the button to change the position of

the <h>. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to freely

adjust the shadow level (0-127) or highlight level (128-255).

kBrightener

Effective in backlit conditions where the subject’s face looks dark.

When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.

Red-eye corr.

Effective in flash images where the subject has red eyes. When [On]

is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.

e Adjusting Printing Effects

The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on

the screen.

When [Detail set.] is selected, you can adjust the [Contrast],

[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color

balance], press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys. B is for blue, A for

amber, M for magenta, G for green. The image’s color balance will be

adjusted towards the color in the direction of move.

If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to

their defaults.

341

w Printing

You can crop the image and print only an

enlarged version of the cropped portion,

as if the image is recomposed.

Set the cropping right before printing.

If you change the print settings after

setting the cropping, you may have to set

the cropping again before printing.

1On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].

2Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.



The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The

cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [

Paper settings

Changing the Cropping Frame Size

Press the or button to change the cropping frame

size. The smaller the cropping frame, the larger the image

magnification will be for printing.

Moving the Cropping Frame

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys to move the frame over

the image vertically or horizontally. Move the cropping frame until

it covers the desired image area.

Switching the Orientations of the Cropping Frame

Pressing the button will toggle the cropping frame

between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you

to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.

Image Tilt Correction

By turning the <6> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to

±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the

image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.

3Press <0> to exit the cropping.

The print setting screen will reappear.



You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print setting screen.

Cropping the Image

Tilt correction

w Printing

342

Depending on the prin ter, the cropped image area may not b e pr int ed as

you specified.

The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will

look in the print.

Check the camera’ s LCD monitor wh ile cropping the image. If you look at

the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed

accurately.

Handling Printer Errors

If printing does not resume af ter you resolve a printer error (no ink, no pa per ,

etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer to resume

printing. For detail s on resuming the printing, refer to th e printer’s instruction

manual.

Error Messages

If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the

camera’s LCD monitor . Press <0> to stop print ing. After f ixing the problem,

resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer to the

printer’s instruction manual.

Paper Error

Check whether the pape r i s properly loaded in the printer.

Ink Error

Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink t ank.

Hardware Error

Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.

File Error

The selected image canno t be print ed via PictBr idge. Images t aken with a

different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.

343

You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.

The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They

cannot be set individually for each image.)

1Select [Pri nt orde r].

Under the [x1] tab, select [Print

order], then press <0>.

2Select [Set up].

Select [Set up], then press <0>.

3Set the option as desired.

Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File

No.].

Select the option to be set, then press

<0>. Select the desired setting, then

press <0>.

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Setting the Printing Options

[Print type][Date][File No.]

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

344

4Exit the setting.

Press the <7> button.

The print order screen will reappear.

Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or

[All image] to order the images to be

printed.

Print type

KStandard Prints one image on one sheet.

LIndex Multiple thumbnail images are printed on

one sheet.

LBoth Prints both the stan dard and index prints.

Date On [On] imprints the recorded date on the print.

Off

File number On [On] imprints the file number on the print.

Off

RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW

images with PictBridge (p.334).

Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may

not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.

With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]

at the same time.

When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications

have been set. It cannot be printed with the specified print order if you

just extract images from the card and try to print them.

Certain DPOF-comp ati ble pri nters and photofinishe rs may not be able to

print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction

manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about

compatibility when ordering prints.

Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a

differe nt camera and then try to specify a prin t order. The print order may

be overwritten. Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on

the image type.

345

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Sel.Image Select and order images one by one.

By pressing the button, you can

select images from a three-image

display. To return to the single-image

display, press the button.

Press the <M> button to save the

print order to the card.

[Standard] [Both]

Press the <W> <X> keys to set the

number of copies to be printed for the

displayed image.

[Index]

Press <0> to add a checkmark to the

box <X>. The image will be included in

the index print.

Byn

Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder . A print order for one

copy of all the images in the folder will be specified. If you select

[Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that

folder will all be canceled.

All image

If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the

card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print

order will be cleared for all the images on the card.

Print Ordering

Quantity

Total images selected

Index icon

Checkmark

Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order

even if you set [Byn] or [All image].

When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one

print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be

printed.

346

With a PictBridge printer, you can easily

print images with DPOF.

1Prepare to print.

See page 334.

Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer” procedure up to step 5.

2Under the [x1] ta b, sele ct [Print order].

3Select [Print].

[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a

printer and printing is possible.

4Set the [Paper settings] (p.336).

Set the printing effects (p.338) if necessary.

5Select [OK].

W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images

Before printing, be sure to set the pa per size.

Certain printers cannot imprint the file number.

If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.

Depending on the print er, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a

bright background or on the border.

Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.



If you stopped the pr inting and want to res um e pr intin g the rem ainin g ima ge s,

select [

Resume

]. Note that printing will not resume if any of the following occurs.

• You changed the print order or dele ted any of th e pr int ord ered imag es

before resuming the printing.

• When index is set, you changed t he paper setting before resuming the

printing.

• The card’s remaining capacity was low when you paused the printing.

If a problem occurs during printing, see page 342.

347

You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When

you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,

the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function

is useful for ordering photobooks online.

1Select [Photobook Set-up].

Under the [x1] tab, select

[Photobook Se t-u p], then press

<0>.

2Select [Select images].

Select [Select images], then press

<0>.

An image will be displayed.

3Select the image to be specified.



T urn the <

> dial to select the image

to be specified, then press <

By pressing the button, you

can select images from a three-image

display. To return to the single-image

display, press the button.

Repeat this step to select other

images. The number of images that

have been specified will be displayed

on the upper left of the screen.

To cancel the image specification,

press <0> again.

To return to the menu, press the

<M> button.

p Specifying Images for a Photobook

Specifying One Image at a Time

p Specifying Images for a Photobook

348

You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set

to [All images in folder] or [All images

on card], all the images in the folder or

on the card will be specified.

To cancel the image specification, select

[Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on

card].

Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card

RAW images and movies cannot be specified.

Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another

camera for another photob ook with this camera. The photobook se tt ings

may be overwritten.

349

Customizing the

Camera

You can customize various camera functions to suit

your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.

Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative

Zone modes.

350

1Select [Custo m Func tion s (C.Fn)] .

Under the [54] tab, select [Custom

Functions (C.Fn)], then press <0>.

2Select the Custom F unction

number.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the Custom Function number, then

press <0>.

3Change the setting as desired.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the desired setting (number), then

press <0>.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to

set other Custom Functions.

At the bottom of the screen, the

current Custom Function settings are

indicated below the respective

function numbers.

4Exit the setting.

Press the <M> button.

The screen for step 1 will reappear.

Under [54: Clear settings], select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to

clear all the Custom Function settings (p.282).

3 Setting Custom FunctionsK

Custom Function number

Clearing All Custom Functions

351

3 Setting Custom FunctionsK

Custom Functions

C.Fn I: Exposure A LV

Shooting kMovie

Shooting

1Exposure level increments p.352 k k

2ISO expansion kIn a

C.Fn II: Image

3Highlight tone priority p.353 k k

C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive

4AF-assist beam firing p.354 k*

5 AF area selection method

6Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking p.355

7AF point display during focus

8 VF display illumination p.356

9Mirror lockup

* When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used.

C.Fn IV: Operation/Others

10 Shutter/AE lock button p.357 k k

11 Assign SET button p.358

(Except 3)

(Except 2, 3, 6)*

12 LCD display when power ON

13 Multi function lock p.359 k k

14 Retract lens on power off kk

* Settings 1 and 4 do not function during movie shooting.

*[5: ISO speed] is settable only for manual exposure shooting.

The shaded Custom Functions do not functi on during Live View (LV)

shooting or movie shooting. (Se ttings are disabled.)

352

Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function

type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Image, C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive, C.Fn

IV: Operation/Others.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

C.Fn I: Exposure

C.Fn-1 Exposure le ve l in crements

0: 1/3-stop

1: 1/2-stop

Sets 1/2-stop increment s for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure

compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is

effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine

increments than 1/3-stop increments.

C.Fn-2 ISO expansion

0: Off

1: On

When you set the ISO speed, you can set “H” (equivalent to ISO

25600) for still photos and “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) for

movies. Note that if [C.Fn-3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1:

Enable], “H” cannot be set.

With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed as shown below.

353

3 Custom Function SettingsK

C.Fn II: Image

C.Fn-3 Highlight tone priority

0: Disable

1: Enable

Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from

the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between

the grays and highlights becomes smoother.

With setting 1, the Auto Lighti ng Optimizer (p.146) is automatically set to

[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.

With setting 1, noise (grainy image, banding, etc.) may become slightly

more noticeable than with setting 0.

With setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800 (up to ISO

6400 for movies).

Also, the <A> icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD

panel to indicate that highlight tone priority is enabled.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

354

C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive

C.Fn-4 AF-assist beam firing

Enables or disables the built-in flash’s AF-assist beam or the EOS-

dedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.

0: Enable

The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary.

1: Disable

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. This prevents the AF-

assist beam from disturbing others.

2: Enable external flash only

If an external S peedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam

when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AF-

assist beam.

3: IR AF assist beam only

When an external Speedlite is att ached, only the infrared AF-assist

beam will be emitted. Set this when you do not want the camera to

fire the AF-assist beam as a burst of small flashes.

With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED

light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.

C.Fn-5 AF area selection method

You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.

0: S 9 AF area selection button

After you press the <S> or button, each time you press the

button, the AF area selection mode changes.

1: S 9 Main Dial

After you press the <S> or button, turning the <6> dial

changes the AF area selection mode.

If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set

to [Disable], this function’s setti ng will be overridden and the AF-assist

beam will not be emitted.



With setting 1, press the <

> <

> keys to move the AF point h orizont ally.

When Battery Grip BG-E18 (sold separately) is used and 1 is set, you

can change the AF area selection mode by operating the battery grip.

355

3 Custom Function SettingsK

C.Fn-6 Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking

Use this function to autofocus by recognizing colors equivalent to skin tones.

This function works in One-Shot AF mode when the AF area selection mode

is set to Zone AF (manual selection of zone) or 19-point AF auto selection.

0: One-Shot AF only

In One-Shot AF mode, the camera selects AF points automatically

based on AF information and information on colors equivalent to

skin tones. This makes focusing on people easier, so you can

prioritize composition in shooting.

1: Disable

AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.

Generally, the nearest subject will be focused on.

C.Fn-7 AF point display during focus

You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following cases: 1.

when selecting the AF point(s), 2. when the camera is ready to shoot (before

AF operation), 3. during AF operation, and 4. when focus is achieved.

0: Selected (constant)

The selected AF point(s) is always displayed.

1: All (constant)

All 19 AF points are always displayed.

2: Selected (pre-AF, focused)

The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.

3: Selected (focused)

The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4.

4: Disable display

For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.

With setting 0, focusing will t ake slightly longer than with setting 1.

Even with setting 0, the expected result may not be obtained depend ing

on the shooting conditions and subject.

Under light so low t hat the flash emit s the AF-assist beam automatically,

AF point s are sel ected au to mati ca lly ba se d only on AF inf ormation . (The

AF will not use information on colors equivalent to skin tones.)

With setting 2 or 3, the AF point will not be displayed even when focus is

achieved with AI Servo AF.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

356

C.Fn-8 VF display illumination

You can set whether or not the AF points in the viewfinder will light up

in red when focus is achieved.

0: Auto

The AF points automatically light up in red under low light.

1: Enable

The AF points light up in red regardless of the ambient light level.

2: Disable

The AF points do not light up in red.

C.Fn-9 Mirror lockup

0: Disable

1: Enable

Prevents camera shake due to camera vibrations in the camera

caused by the reflex mirror action (mirror shock), when shooting

with super telephoto lenses or close-ups (macro photography).

See page 173 for the mirror lockup procedure.

When AI Servo AF is set, there is no illumination in red even when focus is

achieved.

When you press the <S> or button, the AF points will be

illuminated in red regardless of this setting.

The aspect ratio lines (p.130), and the electronic level, grid, and flicker

detectio n se t w ith [52:Viewfinder display] will also light up in red.

357

3 Custom Function SettingsK

C.Fn IV: Operation/Others

C.Fn-10 Shutter/AE lock button

0: AF/AE lock

1: AE lock/AF

This is convenient when you want to focus and meter separately.

Press the <A> button to autofocus, and press the shutter button

halfway to apply AE lock.

2: AF/AF lock, no AE lock

During AI Servo AF (or Servo AF for Live View shooting), you can

press the <A> button to pause the AF operation momentarily.

This prevents the AF from being thrown off by any obstacle

passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is set at

the moment the picture is taken.

3: AE/AF, no AE lock

This is useful for subjects that keep moving and stopping

repeatedly. During AI Servo AF (or Servo AF for Live View

shooting), you can press the <A> button to start or stop the AI

Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the picture

is taken. Thus, you can set your camera, so that the optimum

focusing and exposure can be achieved and wait for the decisive

moment.

During Live View shooting

When touch shutter is set and with setting 1 or 3, AF will not take effect

for shooting.

During movie shooting

With setting 1 or 3, press the <A> button for One-Shot AF.

With setting 2, press the shutter butt on halfway for One-Shot AF.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

358

C.Fn-11 Assign SET button

You can assign a frequently-used function to <0>. When the camera

is ready to shoot, pressing the <0> button will display the respective

function setting screen.

0: Normal (disabled)

1: Image quality

The image quality setting screen will appear.

2: Flash exposure compensation

The flash exposure compensation setting screen will appear.

3: LCD monitor On/Off

You can turn on or off the LCD monitor.

4: Menu display

The menu screen will appear.

5: ISO speed

The ISO speed setting screen will appear.

6: Flash function settings

The built-in flash or external flash function setting screen will

appear.

C.Fn-12 LCD display when power ON

0: Display on

When the power switch is turned on, the shooting settings will be

displayed (p.67).

1: Previous display status

When the power is turned on, the camera will start with the LCD

monitor display status just before the power was last turned off.

Therefore, if you turn off the camera when the LCD monitor is off

or when camera settings (p.362) are displayed, nothing will be

displayed when you turn on the camera again. This helps to save

battery power. The menu operations and image playback will be

available as usual.

359

3 Custom Function SettingsK

C.Fn-13 Multi function lock

When t he < R> switch is set to the right, it can prevent the <6>

and <5> dials from accidentally changing a setting.

Select the camera control you want to lock, then press <0> to

append a checkmark <X> and select [OK].

6: Main Dial

5: Quick Control Dial

C.Fn-14 Retract lens on power off

This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven

STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You

can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s

power switch is set to <OFF>.

0: Enable

1: Disable

If the <R> switch is set and you try to use one of the locked

camera controls, [L] will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD

panel. Also, on the shooting function settings display (p. 56), [LOCK] will

be displaye d .

By default, when locked, the <5> dial will be locked.

With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.

Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.

With setting 0, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s focus mode

switch setting (AF or MF).

360

Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and

Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.

1Select [My Menu settings].

Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu

settings], then pre ss <0>.

2Select [Register to My Menu].

Select [Register to My Menu], then

press <0>.

3Register the desired items.

Select the item, then press <0>.



On the confirmation dialog, select [

]

and press <

> to register the item.

You can register up to six items.

To return to the screen in step 2,

press the <M> button.

Sort

You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select

[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then

press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <W> <X> keys to

change the order, then press <0>.

Delete item/items and Delete all items

You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items]

deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all

registered items.

Display from My Menu

When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you

display the menu screen.

3 Registering My MenuK

My Menu Settings

361

Reference

This chapter provides reference information for camera

features, system accessories, etc.

Certification Logo

Select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to

display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other

certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the

camera body, and on the camera’s package.

362

If you press the button when the

camera is ready to shoot, the screens for

[Displays camera settings],

[Electronic level] (p.70), and [Displays

shooting function] (p.363) will be

displayed in sequence.

Under the [53] tab, [z button

display options] enables you to select

the options displayed when the

button is pressed.

Select the desired display option and

press <0> to append a checkmark

<X>.

After making the selection, select

[OK], then press <0>.

B Button Functions

Camera Settings

Note that you cannot remove the <X> for all three display options.

The [Displays ca mera setti ngs] sample screen is displayed in English

for all languages.

Even if you uncheck the [Electronic level] so it does not appear, it will

still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press

the button.

Date/Time (p.44)

Color space (p.156)

Auto rotate display (p.281)

Auto power off (p.273)

Remaining card capacity

Red-eye reduction (p.177)

Beeper (p.272)

Sensor cleaning (p.286)

Touch control (p.64)

Live View shooting (p.201)

LCD auto off (p.285)

Daylight saving time

(p.44)

WB correction (p.144)/

WB bracketing (p.145)

363

B Button Functions

Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting

settings (p.57).

Shooting Function Settings

Battery level

Shutter speed

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Image-recording quality

Picture Style

Shooting mode

ISO speed

Number of possible shots

AF operation

White balance correction

Exposure level

indicator

Aperture

Highlight tone priority

Quick Control icon

White balance

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Eye-Fi transmission status

Flash exposure

compensation

White balance bracketing

Drive mode

AF area selection mode

Metering mode GPS connection indicator

364

You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor.

Select [Battery info.].

Under the [53] tab, select [Battery

info.], then press <0>.

The battery info. screen will appear.

3 Checking the Battery Information

Battery model or household power source

being used.

The battery level icon (p.43) is displayed.

Battery’s recharge performance level is

displayed in one of three levels.

(Green) : Battery’s recharge

perform a nce is fine.

(Green) : Battery’s recharge

perform a nce is sligh tl y

degraded.

(Red) : Purchasing a new

battery is recommended.

Battery position

The use of a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E17 is recommended. If you

use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, this camera’ s full

performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.

The battery information will be displayed even when Battery Grip BG-

E18 is used. If two LP-E17 battery packs are attached, it displays the

remaining battery level of the two combined.

If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the

message.

365

With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18 (sold separately), you can connect the

camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining

battery level.

1Connect the DC Coupler ’s plug.

Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the

AC Adapter’s socket.

2Connect the power cord.

Connect the power cord as shown in

the illustration.

After using the camera, unplug the

power plug from the power outlet.

3Insert the DC Coupler.

Open the battery compartment cover

and insert the DC Coupler until it

securely locks in place.

4Push in the DC cord.

Open the DC cord hole cover and

install the cord as shown in the

illustration.

Close the battery compartment cover.

Using a Household Power Outlet

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord when the camera’s power

switch is set to <1>.

366

This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to

approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet away from the camera. You can either shoot

immediately or use a 2-sec. delay.

Set the drive mode to <Q> (p.124).

Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control

sensor and press the transmit button.

The camera will autofocus.

When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light up and the

picture will be taken.

Remote Control Shooting

Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold Separately)

Remote control sensor

Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause ca mera misoperation by

triggeri ng th e sh u tte r ina dvertently. Try to keep the camera awa y fr o m

such light sources.

If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and

operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutt er

inadvertently.

Remote Controller RC-1/RC-5 (sold separately) can also be used.

Remote control shooting is also possible with an EX-series Speedlite

equipped with a remote-release function.

The Remote Controller can also be used during movie shooting (p.233).

Note that Remote Controller RC-5 ca nnot be used to take still photos in

the movie shooting mode.

367

Remote Control Shooting

Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) comes with an approx. 60

cm/2.0 ft cord. When connected to the camera’s remote control

terminal, it can be pressed halfway and completely, just like the shutter

button.

When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look

through the viewfinder , stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the

picture to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.35)

attached to the camera strap.

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the

eyepiece cover is unnecessary.

1Detach the eyecup.

Push the bottom of the eyecup to

detach it.

2Attach the eyepiece co ver.

Slide the eyepiece cover down into

the eyepiece groove to attach it.

After you finish shooting, detach the

eyepiece cover and attach the

eyecup by sliding it down into the

eyepiece groove.

F Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Sold Separately)

Using the Eyepiece Cover

368

With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can

automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to

an online service via a wireless LAN.

The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on

how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image

transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or

contact the card manufacturer.

The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions

(including wireless transfer). In case of a problem with an Eye-

Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note

that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries

or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted.

If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in

your area, please check with the card manufacturer.

1Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.39).

2Select [Eye-Fi settings].

Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi

settings], then pre ss <0>.

This menu is displayed only when an

Eye-Fi card is inserted into the

camera.

3Enable Eye-Fi transmission.

Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press

<0>.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

If you set [Disable], there will be no

automatic transmission even with the

Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission

status icon I).

Display the connection information.

Select [Connection info.], then press

<0>.

H Using Eye-Fi Cards

369

H Using Eye-Fi Cards

5Check the [Access point SSID:].

Check that an access point is

displayed for [Access point SSID:].

You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s

MAC address and firmware version.

Press the <M> button three times

to exit the menu.

6Take the picture.

The picture is transferred and the

<H> icon switches from gray (not

connected) to one of the icons below.

For transferred images, O is

displayed in the shooting information

display (p.320).

H (Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.

H (Blinking) Connecting...: Connecting to access point.

H (

Illuminated

) Connected: Connection to access point established.

H () Transferring... :

Image transfer to access point in progress.

Transmission status icon

Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards

If [51:Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], image transfer with an Eye - Fi card

is not possible.

If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card

information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on aga in.

Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In

hospitals, airports, an d other places where wireless transmissions are

prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.

If the image transfer do es not function, check the Eye-Fi card and

computer settings. For det ails, refer to the card’s instruction manual.

Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image

transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.

The Eye-Fi card may become hot as it transmit s.

The battery power will be consumed faster.

During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.



If you insert a wireless LAN ca rd other than an Eye-Fi card, [

Eye-Fi se ttings

]

will not appe ar. Also, the transmission status icon <

> will not appear.

370

o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disable d

*1: 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.

*2: Setta ble only during Live View shooting.

*3: Works only during viewfinder shooting.

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes

Function A 7 C2 3 4 5 8

C P x 6 F G

All image quality settings selectable

kkkkkkkkkkkk

*1 k*1

ISO speed

Automatically set/Auto

ooooooooooo o o

Manually set

Picture

Style

Automatically set/Auto

DDDDDDDDDDD D D

Manual selection

Extra Effect Sh ot* 1k

Ambience-based shots kkkkkkkkk k

Lighting/scene based shots kkkkk

Background blur k

Color tone kk

Creative fil t ers*1*2kkkkkkkkk k

White

balance

Auto ooooooooooo o o

Preset

Custom

Correction/Bracketing

Auto Lighting Optimizer ooooooooooo o o

Lens

aberration

correction

Peripher al il lum ination correc tion

kkkkkkkkkkk k k

Chromatic aberration correction

kkkkkkkkkkk k k

Distortion correction kkkkkkkkkkk

Long exposure noise reduction

High ISO speed noise reduction ooooooooooo o o

Highlight tone priority

Anti-flicker shooting*3ooooooooooo o o

Color

space

sRGB ooooooooooo o o

Adobe RGB

Metering

mode

Evaluative metering ooooooooo oo o

Center-weighted

average meter i ng o

Metering mode selection

371

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

Function A 7 C2 3 4 5 8

C P x 6 F G

AF operation

(Viewfinder

shooting)

One-Shot AF ooo ooooo

AI Servo AF oo

AI Focus AF ooo

AF operation

(

Live View shooting

)

One-Shot AF oooooo oooo

Servo AF oo

AF area selection mode

AF point selection ooooooooooooo

AF-assist beam ooo oooooo

Continuous AF*2 kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Exposure

Program shift

Exposure compensation

AEB

AE lock

Depth-of-field preview

Drive mode

Single shooting kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Continuous sh ootin g

kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Silent single

shooting*3 kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Silent continuous

shooting*3 kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Self-timer kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Built-in

flash

Automatic firing kkk k k o

Manual firi ng kkk kkk k

Flash off kokkokokko ko

Red-eye reduction kkk kkk kk

FE lock*3

Flash exposure compensation

Wireless control

External

flash

Function settings

Custom Function settings

Live View shooting kkkkkkkkk kkk

Aspect ratio

Quick Control kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Feature guide kkkkkkkkkkkkk

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

372

o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disable d

*1: 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.

*2: Setta ble only during Live View shooting.

*3: Works only during viewfinder shooting.

Still Photo Shooting in Creative Zone Modes

Function d s f a

All image quality settings selectable kkkk

ISO speed Automatically set/Auto kkkk

Manually set kkkk

Picture Style Automatically set/Auto kkkk

Manual selection kkkk

Extra Effect Sh ot

Ambience-based shots

Lighting/scene based shots

Background blur

Color tone

Creative fil t ers*1*2 kkkk

White balance

Auto kkkk

Preset kkkk

Custom kkkk

Correction/Bracketing kkkk

Auto Lighting Optimizer kkkk

Lens aberration

correction

Periphera l ill um ination

correction kkkk

Chromatic aberration

correction kkkk

Distortion correction kkkk

Long exposure noise reduction kkkk

High ISO speed noise reduction kkkk

Highlight tone priority kkkk

Anti-flicker shooting*3 kkkk

Color space sRGB kkkk

Adobe RGB kkkk

Metering mode Evaluative metering kkkk

Metering mode selection

kkkk

373

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*4: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.

Function d s f a

AF operation

(Viewfinder shooting)

One-Shot AF kkkk

AI Servo AF kkkk

AI Focus AF kkkk

AF operation

(Live View shooting)

One-Shot AF kkkk

Servo AF kkkk

AF area selection mode

kkkk

AF point selection kkkk

AF-assist beam kkkk

Continuous AF*2 kkkk

Exposure

Program shift k

Exposure compensation

kkk

AEB kkkk

AE lock kkk *4

Depth-of-field preview kkkk

Drive mode

Single shooting kkkk

Continuous shoo t i ng

kkkk

Silent single shooting

*3 kkkk

Silent continuous shooting

kkkk

Self-timer kkkk

Built-in flash

Automatic firing

Manual firing kkkk

Flash off kkkk

Red-eye reduction kkkk

FE lock kkkk

Flash exposure compensation

kkkk

Wireless control kkkk

External flash Function settings kkkk

Custom Function settings

kkkk

Live View shooting kkkk

Aspect ratio kkkk

Quick Control kkkk

Feature guide kkkk

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

374

o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disable d

*1: The z icon indicates still photo shooting dur ing movie shooting.

*2: Still photos with a Miniature effect will be taken.

Movie Shooting

Function

Movies Still Photos

A 7 C2 3 4 5 8 d s f a z*1

ykMykM

All image quality settings

selectable (movie) kkkkkkk k kkkk

All image quality settings

selectable (still photos) kkk

Video snapshot kkkkkkk k kkkk

HDR movie shooting kkkkkkk k

Miniature effect movie kkkkkkk k kkkkk

*2 k*2 k*2

Digital zoom kkkkkkk k kkkk

ISO

speed

Automatically set/Auto

ooooooo o oooko o k

Manually set k k

Picture

Style

Automatically set/Auto

ooooooo o kkkko k k

Manual selection kkkk kk

White

balance

Auto ooooooo o kkkk o k k

Preset kkkk kk

Custom kkkk kk

Correction kkkk kk

Bracketing kk

Auto Lighting Optimizer ooooooo o kkkko k k

Lens

aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination

correction

kkkkkkk k kkkkk k k

Chrom atic aberration

correction

kkkkkkk k kkkkk k k

Distortion correction

Long exposure noise reduction

High ISO speed noise reduction

Highlight tone priority kkkk kk

Color

space

sRGB ooooooo o ooooo k k

Adobe RGB kk

375

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*3: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.

*4: Works only before you start shooting a movie.

Function

Movies Still Photos

A 7 C2 3 4 5 8 d s f a z*1

ykMykM

Metering mode

Face+Tracking kkkkkkk k kkkkk k k

FlexiZone - Multi kkkkkkk k kkkkk k k

FlexiZone - Single kkkkkkk k kkkkk k k

Manual focus

(MF) kkkkkkk k kkkkk k k

Servo AF kkkkkkk k kkkkk k k

Exposure

Program shift

AE lock kkk *3 k*3

Exposure

compensation kkk k

AEB

Depth- of-field preview

Drive

mode

Single shooting kkk

Continuous

shooting*4kkk

Silent single

shooting

Silent continuo us

shooting

Self-timer*4kkk

Built-in flash

Aspect ratio

Sound recording kkkkkkk k kkkk

Quick Control kkkkkkk k kkkkk k k

376

System Map

Eyecup Ef

Rubber Frame Ef

Eyepiece Extender

EP-EX15

Angle Finder C

Wide Strap

Battery Pack

LP-E17

Battery Charger

LC-E17 or LC-E17E

AC Adapter

AC-E6 DC Coupler

DR-E18

AC Adapter Kit

ACK-E18

Hand Strap E2

Macro Ring Lite

MR-14EX II

ST-E2 Macro Twin Lite

MT-24EX

270EX II 320EX 430EX II 600EX-RT/

600EX

ST-E3-RT 90EX

Semi Hard Case

EH26-L/EH27-L

Bundled

Accessories

E-series Dioptric

Adjustment Lenses

Magnifier

MG-Ef

Battery Grip

BG-E18

377

System Map

HDMI Cable

HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

EF-S lenses

EF lenses

SD/SDHC/SDXC

memory card Card reader

Interface Cable

(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

PictBridge-compatible printer

Computer

TV/Video

Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U

(1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)

Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

GPS Receiver

GP-E2

Remote Switch

RS-60E3

Remote

Controller

RC-6

Card slot

USB port

EOS DIGITAL

Solution Disk

Connect Station CS100

* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.

External microphone

378

r Shooting 1 (Red) Page

* Not selectable in the <F> and <G> modes.

s Shooting 2 (Red)

3 Menu Settings

Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooti ng

Image quality 73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /

1+73* / 1*126

Beep Enable / Touch to y / Disable 272

Release shutter

without card Enable / Disable 272

Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 273

Lens aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction: Enable / Disable

150

Chromatic aberration correction: Enable / Disable

Distortion correction: Disable / Enable

Red-eye reduction Disable / Enable 177

Flash control

Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.

speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings /

External flash function settings / External flash

C.Fn setting / Clear settings

183

Exposure

compensation/AEB 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB:

±2 stops) 170

Auto Lighting

Optimizer Disable / Low / Standard / High 146

Disabled in manual exposure

Custom White Ba la nce

Manual setting of white balance 142

White balance shift/

bracketing WB correction: Whit e balance correction

BKT setting: White balance bracketing 144

145

Color space sRGB / Adobe RGB 156

Picture Style

DAuto / PStandard /QP o rtrait /

RLandscape /SNeutral / UFaithful /

VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3 135

Metering mode q Evaluative metering / w Partial metering /

r Spot metering /

e Center-weighted average metering 167

Shaded menu options are not disp layed in Basic Zo ne modes.

379

3 Menu Settings

t Shooting 3 (Red) Page

i Live View Shooting (Red)

1 Playback 1 (Blue)

Dust Delete Data Obtain data to be used by EOS software to

delete dust spots 287

ISO Auto Max. ISO 400, Max. ISO 800, Max. ISO 1600,

Max. ISO 3200, Max. ISO 6400 133

Long exposure noise

reduction Disable / Auto / Enable 148

High ISO speed noise

reduction Disable / Low / Standard / High /

Multi Shot Noise Reduction 147

Aspect ratio 3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1 130

Anti-flicker shooting Disable / Enable 154

Live View shooting Enable / Disable 203

AF method u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /

FlexiZone - Single 218

Continuous AF Enable / Disable 214

Touch Shutter Disable / Enable 226

Grid display Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m214

Metering timer 4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /

10 min. / 30 min. 215

Protect images Protect images 316

Rotate image Rotate images 297

Erase images Erase images 318

Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) 343

Photobook Set-up Specify images for a photobook 347

Creative filters Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /

Art bold effect / Water painting effect /

Toy camera effect / Miniature effect 326

Resize Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count 329

3 Menu Settings

380

2 Playback 2 (Blue) Page

4 Set-up 1 (Yellow)

* For details, refer to the Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM.

Cropping Crop part of the image 331

Rating [OFF] / l / m / n / o / p298

Slide show Playback description / Display time / Repeat /

Transition effect / Background music 308

Image jump with 6 1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /

Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating 293

AF point display Disable / Enable 323

Histogram display Brightness / RGB 324

Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 313

Select folder Create and select a folder 275

File numbering Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset 277

Auto rotate OnzD / OnD / Off 281

Format card Initialize and erase data on the card 65

Wi-Fi/NFC Disable / Enable

Allow NFC connections

Wi-Fi function T ransfer images between cameras / Connect to

smartphone / Print from Wi-Fi printer / Upload

to Web service / V iew imag es on DLNA devices

Eye-Fi settings Displayed when a commercially-available Eye-

Fi card is inserted 368

381

3 Menu Settings

6 Set-up 2 (Yellow) Page

Auto power off 30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /

15 min. / Disable 273

LCD brightness Adjust the brightness (seven levels) 274

LCD auto off Enable / Disable 285

Date/Time/Zone

Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) /

Daylight saving time / Time zone

LanguageKSelect the interface language 46

Viewfinder display

Electronic level: Hide / Show 70

Grid display: Hide / Show 69

Flicker detection: Show / Hide 72

GPS device settings Settings available when the GPS Receiver

GP-E2 (sold separately) is attached -

When using Wi-Fi f unction or GPS device, be sure to check the countri es

and areas of use, and use the device in accordance with the laws and

regulations of the country or region.

[Wi-Fi/NFC] cannot be set if the camera is connected to a computer,

printer, GPS receiver, TV set, or other device with a cable. When [Wi-Fi/

NFC] is set to [Enable], you cannot connect the camera to the above

devices with a cable.

When connecting this camera and the GPS Receiver GP-E2 with a

cable, update the firmware of GP-E2 to Ver.2.0.0 or later. With the older

versions, you cannot use this camera and GP-E 2 connected with a

cable. Note that GP-E2 can be used by attaching it to the camera’s hot

shoe.

For how to update the firmware, refer to the Canon Web site or contact

the nearest Canon Service Center.

3 Menu Settings

382

7 Set-up 3 (Yellow) Page

C Set-up 4 (Yellow)

* During firmware u pdates, the t ouch screen will be disabled to prevent accident al

operations.

9 My Menu (Green)

Screen color Select the shooting settings scre en color 285

Feature guide Enable / Disable 73

Touch control Standard / Sensitive / Disable 64

Battery information Remaining capacity / Recharge performance 364

Sensor cleaning

Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable 286

Clean now

Clean manually 289

zbutton display

options Displays camera settings / Electronic level /

Displays shooting functions 362

Video system NTSC / PAL 312

Certification Logo

Display Displays some of the logos of the camera’s

certifications 361

Custom Functions

(C.Fn) Customize camera functions as desired 352

Display copyright information /

Enter author’s name /

Enter copyright det ails /

Delete copyright information

279

Clear settings Clear all camera settings /

Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) 282

zfirmware ver.* For updating the firmware -

My Menu settings Register frequently-used menu options and

Custom Functions 360

383

3 Menu Settings

r Shooting 1 (Red) Page

s Shooting 2 (Red)

k Movie Shooting

Image quality 73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /

1+73 / 1126

Beep Enable / Touch to y / Disable 272

Release shutter

without card Enable / Disable 272

Image review Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 273

Lens aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /

Disable 150

Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /

Disable

Exposure

compensation 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±3 stops 170

Auto Lighting

Optimizer Disable / Low / Standard / High 146

Disable during manual exposure

Custom white

balance Manual setting of white balance 142

White balance shift/

bracketing WB correction: Whit e balance correction

BKT setting: White balance bracketing 144

145

Color space sRGB / Adobe RGB 156

Picture Style

DAuto / PStandard /

QPortrait / RLandscape /

SNeutra l / UFaithful /

VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3

135

Shaded menu options are not displa yed in Basic Zone modes.

The menu tabs and options displayed will differ between viewfinder

shooting/Live View shooting and movie shooting. Note that the menu

tabs and options displa yed in [x1] Playback 1, [x2] Playback 2, [51]

Set-up 1 to [54] Set-up 4 and [9] My Menu are the same as those

displayed in viewfinder shooting/Live View shooting (p.379-382).

The [Z1] and [Z2] menu tabs will appear only for movie shooting.

3 Menu Settings

384

t Shooting 3 (Red) Page

v Movie 1 (Red)

w Movie 2 (Red)

* In Basic Zone modes, [Sound recording] will be set to [On/Off].

Dust Delete Data Obtain data to be used by EOS software to

delete dust spots 287

AF method u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /

FlexiZone - Single 263

Movie Servo AF Enable / Disable 263

AF with shutter button

during movie shooting

kOne-Shot AF / Disable 265

Grid display Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m265

Metering timer 4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /

10 min. / 30 min. 265

Movie recording size

• 1920x1080 / 1280x720 / 640x480

• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p

PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p

• Standard / Light

245

Digital zoom Disable / Approx. 3-10x zoom 265

Sound recording*

Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable

266

Recording level

Wind filter: Auto / Disable

Attenuator: Disable / Enable

Video snapshot

Video snapshot: Enable / Disable

253

Album settings: Create a new album / Add to

existing album

Show confirm message: Enable/Disable

385

If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting

Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,

contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

Do not use any battery pack other than a genuine Battery Pack

LP-E17.

If (1) the battery charger or battery pack has a p roblem or (2)

communication with the battery pack failed (with a non-Canon battery

pack), th e protectio n circuit will stop chargi ng, and the c harge lamp will

blink in orange. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug

from the power outle t. Detach and reattach the batte ry pack to the

charger. Wait a few minutes, then r econnect the power plug to the

power outlet. If the prob lem persists, contact your dealer or n earest

Canon Service Center.

Make sure the battery is properly installed in the camera (p. 38).

Make sure the battery compartment cover is clos ed (p.38).

Make sure the card slo t cover is closed (p.39).

Recharge the battery (p.36).

Press the button (p.67).

If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card,

the access lamp will rema in on/continue to bli nk for a few se co nd s .

When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off

automatically.

Troubleshooting Guide

Power-Related Problems

The battery pack does not recharge.

The battery charger’s lamp blinks.

The ca mera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <

The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to <

Troubleshooting Guide

386

Do not use any battery pack other than a genuine Battery Pack LP-

E17.

Remove and install the battery again (p.38).

If the battery contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.

Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.36).

The battery pe rformance may have de graded. See [53: Battery info.]

to check the battery’s recharge performance le vel (p.364). I f the

battery per formance is poor, replace the battery pack with a new one.

The rechargeable batter y pack performance will degrade over

repeated use. Purchase a new one.

The number of possible shots will decrease with an y of the following

operations:

• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

• A ctivating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.

• Using the LCD monitor frequently.

• Continuing Live View shooting or movi e shooting for a prolonged

period.

• The Eye-Fi card’s communication function is operating.

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take

effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.273).

Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will

still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s

power does not turn off.) Press the button to turn on the LCD

monitor.

[Battery communication error. Does this battery/do these

batteries display the Canon logo?] is displayed.

The battery be comes exhausted quickly.

The camera turns off by itself.

387

Troubleshooting Guide

The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses (p.47).

Install a recharged battery pack in the camera (p.36).

Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.39).

Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the write/erase position (p.39).

If the card is full, replace the card or dele te unnecessary images to

make space (p.39, 318).

If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator

<o> in the viewf inder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the

shutter butto n ha lfwa y ag ain to refocus automatically, or focus

manually (p.5 2, 12 1).

If a card error mess ag e is di sp layed, see pa ge 39 or 399.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.47).

Press the shutte r bu tton gently to preve nt ca mera shake (p.51-52).

If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.

In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter

speed (p.160), set a higher ISO speed (p.132), use flash (p.176), or

use a tripod.

Shooting-Related Problems

The lens cannot be attached.

The viewfinder is dark.

No images can be shot or recorded.

The card cannot be used.

The image is out of focus.

Troubleshooting Guide

388

Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the

AI Servo AF mode, or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF mode

(p.110).

Depending on the su bject, linear noise or moire may be record ed in

the image.

It is likely to occur especially in the following cases.

• Shooting fine horizontal stripes, lattice patterns, etc.

• When there is an intense light source such as sunlight or lighting in

or near the shooting range.

In such a case, noise and moire may be reduced by the following

measures.

• Change the size of the subject by changing the focusing dis tance or

zoom magnificati on .

• Recompose the shot to prevent an intense light source from entering

the shooting range.

• Attach the lens h ood to prevent intense light from entering the lens.

If you use a TS-E lens and shift or tilt, linear noise or moire may be

recorded in the i mage.

Horizontal stripes (noise) or irregular e xposures can be caused by

fluoresce nt lighting, LED lighting, or other light so urces during

viewfinder or Live View shooting. Also, the exposure or color tone may

not come out ri ght. A slow shutt er speed may solve the problem.

I cannot lock the focus and recompose the sho t.

Linear noise or moire appears in the image.

Horizontal stripes appear, or the exposure or color tone look

strange.

389

Troubleshooting Guide

Depending on the lens type, shutter speed, aperture, su bject

conditions, brightness, etc., th e continuous shooting speed may

become slower.

If [z3: Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to [Enable] and you shoot under a

flickering light source , the continuou s shooting speed may become

slightly slower, or the continuous shooting interval may become

irregular. Also, the time lag until shutter release may be slightly longer

than usual (p.154).

If you set [Distortion] to [Enable], the continuous shooting sp eed will

decrease (p.151).

If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the

file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower

than the number mentioned on page 127.

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]

is set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [0: Disable] is s et, ISO

100 can be set (p.353). This also applies to movie shooting (p.238).



Under [

4: Custom Functions (C.Fn)

], if [

3: Highlight tone priority

] is

set to [

1: Enable

], the [

] ISO speed (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot

be selected even when [

2: ISO expansion

] is set to [

1: On

]. If [

Disable

] is set for [

3: Highlight tone priority

], [

] can be set (p.353).

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]

is set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If [0:

Disable] is set, the Auto Lightin g Optimizer can be set (p.3 53 ).

The continuous shooting speed is slow.

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.

ISO 100 cannot be set.

ISO speed [H] (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be set.

The Auto Lighti ng Optimi zer cann ot be set.

Troubleshooting Guide

390

Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Low],

[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure

compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come

out bright (p.1 46 ).

If you shoot at night when th e background is dark, the shutter speed

automatical ly be co mes slow (slow-sync sh ooting) so that both the

subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow

shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control ], set [Flash sync. speed in

Av mode] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/20 0 sec. (fixed)] (p.184).

In shooting modes (<A> <C> <2> <4> <C> <6>) whose

default setting is <a> (Auto flash), the built -in flas h will be raised

automatical ly w he n ne ce ss ary.

In the <x> and <G> modes, when you press the shutter button

halfway under low-light conditions, the built-in fla sh may be raised

automatical ly an d emit the AF-assist beam.

If you use the built-in flash too often in too short a period of time, the

flash may stop firing for a while to protect the light-emitting unit.

If you use a fl ash unit other than an EX-ser ies Speedlite, the flash will

always be fired at fu ll ou tpu t (p.182).

Under [z1: Flash control], if [Flash metering mode] in [External

flash C.Fn setting] is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the

flash will always fire at full output (p.188).

Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,

the image comes out bright.

When I use the <f> mode with flash, the shutter speed

becom e s sl ow.

The built-in flash rises by it self.

The built-in flash does not fire.

The external flash alwa ys fi res at full output.

391

Troubleshooting Guide



If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, flash

exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the

external S peedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0),

flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.

Under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to

[Auto] (p.184).

A small noise may be heard when the camera’s internal mechanism

moves slightly.

If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot

(p.203).

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white

<s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.

If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or

movie shooti ng will soon stop automatically (p.230, 268).

Flash exposure compensation cannot be set for the

external Speedlite.

High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.

The camera makes a small noise when it is shaken.

The shutter makes two shooting sounds during

Live View shooting.

During Live View or movie shooting, a white <s> or

red <E> icon is displayed.

Troubleshooting Guide

392

If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop

automatically . Use an SD S peed Class 6 “ ” or faster card. To

find out the card’s reading/writi ng speed, refer to the card

manufactur er’s Web site, etc.

If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting

will stop automatically.

In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set

automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set the ISO speed

(p.238).

If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the

changes in the exposure may be recorded.

Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the

exposure regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes

or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.

If you move the camera t o the lef t or right q uickly (hig h-speed p anning)

or shoot a movi ng subject, the image may look distorted.

Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be

caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or othe r light sources

during movie shooting. Also, changes in t he exposure (brightness) or

color tone may be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter speed

may reduce the problem.

Movie shooting stops by itself.

The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.

The exposure changes during movie shooting.

The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.

The image flickers or horizontal stripes appea r during

movie shooting.

393

Troubleshooting Guide

If the camera is connected to a computer, printer, GPS receiver, TV

set, or othe r device wi th a cable, Wi-Fi cann ot be set ([51: W i-Fi/NFC]

will be grayed out). Disconnect the cable before changing any settings.

For details, refer to the Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction Manual.

Set the <R> sw itch to the left (lock release, p.55).

Check the setting for [13: Multi function lock] under [54: Custom

Functions (C.Fn).] (p.359).

Check if your finger is blocking the speaker (p.26).

If there is dust on top of the eyepiece cover (p.367), the LCD monitor

may not turn on or may suddenly turn off, due to incorrect operation of

the display-off sensor. If this occurs, remove the dust.

If the LCD monitor does not turn on with Eyepiece Extender EP-EX15ll

(sold separately) or Magnifier MG-Ef (sold separately) attached to the

viewfinder, set [52: LCD auto off] to [Disable] (p.285).

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi ca nnot be set.

Operation Problems

I cannot change the setting with the <6> dial or <5> dial.

During touch screen operations, the beeper suddenly

sounds softer.

Display Problems

The LCD monitor doe s not t urn o n or su ddenly turns off.

Troubleshooting Guide

394

In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and

menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative

Zone mode (p.59).

Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character

will be an unde rscore (p.156).

It is a movie file (p.278).

If the card already contains rec orded images, the image number may

not start from 0001 (p.278).

Check that the correct date and time are se t (p.44).

Check the time zone and dayli ght saving time ( p.44).

The shooting date and time do not appear in the picture. The date and

time are inst ead recorded in the image data as shooting infor m ation.

When printing, you can imprint the date and t ime in the pictu re, using

the date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.339).

The menu screen sh ows fewer tabs and options.

The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).

The file name start s with “MVI_”.

The file numbering does not st art from 0001.

The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.

The date and time are not in the pict ure.

395

Troubleshooting Guide

If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the

camera can display, [###] will be displayed (p.299).

If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.

In low or high temperatures, the LCD mo nitor display may seem slow

or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.

[Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in

the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the

LOCK position, you will not be able to check t he card’s connection

status or disable Eye-Fi transmi ssion (p.368).

It is the highlight alert (p.324). Overe xposed areas with clipped

highlight will blink.

If the image is protected , it cannot be erased (p.316).



Movies edited with a computer can not be played back with the camera.

[###] is displayed.

The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.

[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.

Playback Problems

Part of the image blinks in black.

The image cannot be erased.

The movie cannot be played back.

Troubleshooting Guide

396

If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the

operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external microphone

(commercial ly available) is recommended (p.266).

During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the

exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness

stabilizes. In such cases, shoot in <a> mode (p.237).

Check that the HDMI ca ble or st ereo AV cable’s plug is in serted all the

way in (p.312-315).

Set the [53: Video system] correctly to [NTSC] or [PAL] (depending

on the video system of your TV se t).

If [51: Wi- Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot be connected

to a TV set. Set [Wi-Fi/NFC] to [Disable], then reconnect the camera

to the TV set with the HDMI cable or stereo AV cable.

If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created

automatical ly (p .2 47 ).

Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards

may not be corr ectly reco gnized. In suc h a case, conn ect your ca mera

to the comput er with the interface cable, th en transfer the images to

your computer using EOS Utility (EOS software, p.420).

JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized or cropped (p.329,

p.331).

Camera operation noise can be heard when the movie is

played back.

The movie has still moment s.

No picture on the TV set.

There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.

My card reader does not recognize the card.

I cannot resize the image. I cannot crop the image.

397

Troubleshooting Guide

[32: AF point disp . ] is set to [Enable] (p.323).

Even if [32: AF point display] is set to [Enable] (p.323), the red box

is not displayed for the following images:

• Images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction (p.147)

• Images recorded with distortion correction enabled (p.15 1)

• Images shot with <F> or <G> in <8> mode

• Cropped images (p.331)

• Images with Fis h-eye effect applied after shooting (p.326)

If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no

picture is taken (p.286).

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short

interval, the <f> icon may not be displ ayed (p.42).

A red box is displayed on the image.

A red box is not displayed on the image.

Sensor Cleaning Problems

The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.

Automatic sensor cleanin g does not work.

Troubleshooting Guide

398

Contents displa yed on the screen vary depending on the printe r. This

instruction manual lists all th e printing effects available (p.338).

If any of the following shooting modes or functions is set, the camera

cannot be connected to a printer. Cancel all the relevant settings, then

reconnect the camera to the printer wit h an interface cable.

•<F> or <G> in <8> mode

• Multi Shot Noise Reductio n

•[51: Wi-Fi/NFC] set to [Enable]

Install the EOS software (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD-ROM) on

the computer (p.420).

If [51: Wi- Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot be connected

to a computer. Set [Wi-Fi/NFC] to [Disable], then reco nn e ct th e

camera to a computer with an interface cable .

Printing-Related Problems

There are fewer printing effect s than listed in

the instruction manual.

Direct printing does not work.

Computer Connection Problems

I cannot download images to a computer.

399

If there is a problem with the camera, an

error message will appear. Follow the on-

screen instructions.

* If the error still pers is ts, write down the error number and contact your

nearest Canon Service Center.

Error Codes

Number Error Message and Solution

Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the

lens contacts.

Clean the electrical cont acts on the camera and lens, use a Canon

lens, or remove and install the battery pack again (p.25, 26, 38).

Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card

with camera.

Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the

card (p.39, 65).

Cannot save images because card is full. Replace car d.

Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card

(p.39, 318, 65).

The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on

again.

Operate the power switch (p.42).

Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and

on again.

Operate the power switch (p.42).

10, 20

30, 40

50, 60

70, 80

An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or

re-install the battery.

Operate the power switch, remove and inst all the battery pack

again, or use a Canon lens (p.42, 38, 47).

Error number

Cause and countermeasures

400

Kit lenses* use a stepping motor that drives the focus lens. The motor

controls the focus lens even during zooming.

* EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5 .6 IS STM, EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM, and

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM

1. When the camera is OFF

The motor does not operate while the camera is OFF or when the

camera is OFF due to the auto power off function. Therefore, users

must be aware of the following points.

Manual focusing is not possible.

During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.

2. When the lens is in sleep mode

If not operated for a certain period of time, this lens will enter sleep

mode in order to save power, ap art from the camera’s auto power off.

To exit sleep mode, press the shutter button halfway.

In sleep mode, the motor will not operate even if the camera is ON.

Therefore, users must be aware of the following points.

Manual focusing is not possible.

During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.

3. During initial reset

When the camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON by

pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF due to

the auto power off function*1, the lens performs an initial reset of the

focus lens.

Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of focus

during the initial reset, this is not a malfunction.

Wait approx. 1 second*2 until the initial reset has completed

before shooting.

*1: Applicable to the following EF-S lens compatible digital SLR cameras:

EOS 7D Mark II, EO S 7D, EOS 70D, EOS 60D, EOS 60Da, EOS 50D, EOS

40D, EOS 30D, EOS 20D, EO S 20Da, EOS REBEL T3i/600D, EOS REB EL

T2i/550D, EOS REBEL T1i/500D, EOS REBEL XSi/450D, EOS REBEL T5/

1200D, EOS REBEL T3/1100D, EOS REBEL XS/1000D, EOS DIGITAL

REBEL XTi/400D DIGITAL, EOS DIGITAL REBEL XT/350D DIGITAL, EOS

DIGITAL REBEL/300D DIGITAL

*2: The initial reset time varies depending on the camera used.

Handling Precautions: STM Lenses (Kit Lenses)

401

•Type

Type:

Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in flash

Recording media: SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards

* Compatible with UHS-I cards

Image sensor size: Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm

Compatible lenses: Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)

* Excluding EF-M lenses

(35 mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the

lens focal length)

Lens mount: Canon EF mount

• Image Sensor

Type: CMOS sensor

Effect ive pixels: Approx. 24.2 megapixels

* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000th.

Aspect ratio: 3:2

Dust delete feature: Auto/Manual , Appending Dust Delete Data

• Recording System

Recording format: Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0

Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original)

RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possible

Recorded pixels: L (Large) : 24 megapixels (6000 x 4000)

M (Medium) : Approx. 10.6 megapixels (3984 x 2656)

S1 (Small 1): Approx. 5.9 megapixels (2976 x 1984)

S2 (Small 2): Approx. 2.5 megapixels (1920 x 1280)

S3 (Small 3): Approx. 350,000 pixels (7 20 x 480)

RAW : 24 megapixels (6000 x 4000)

Aspect ratio: 3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1

Create/select a folder: Possible

File numbering: Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset

• Image Processing During Shooting

Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,

Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3

Basic+: Ambience-based shots, Light/scene-based shots

Extra Effect Shot: Possible (in <CA> mode)

White balance: Auto, Preset (Daylight, Sha de, Cloudy, Tungsten light,

White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom

White Balance correction and White balance bracketing

possible

* Flash color temperature information transmission

enabled

Specifications

402

Noise reduction: Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots

Automatic image

brightness correction: Auto Lighting Optimizer

Highlight tone priority: Provided

Lens aberration

correction: Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration

correction, Distortion correction

• Viewfinder

Type: Eye-level pentamirror

Coverage: Vertical/Horizontal approx. 95% (with Eye point approx.

19 mm)

V ertical field of view in the 16:9 aspect ratio is approx. 93%.

Magnification: Approx. 0.82x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)

Eye point: Approx. 19 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)

Built-in dioptric

adjustment: Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)

Focusing screen: Fixed, Precision Matte

Grid display: Possible

Electronic level display: Possible

Mirror: Quick-return type

Depth-of-field preview: Provided

• Autofocus

Type: TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference

detection with the dedica ted AF sensor

AF points: 19 points (cross-type AF point: max. 19 po i n ts)

* With certain lenses, cross-type focusing at the

peripheral AF points is not possible.

* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with center AF point.

(Except with the EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and

EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro.)

Focusing brightness range:

EV -0.5 - 18 (Conditions: f/2.8-se nsitive center AF point ,

One-Shot AF, room temperature, ISO 100)

Focus operation: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF

Manual focusing (MF)

AF area selection mode: Single-point AF (Manual selection), Zone AF (Manual

selection of zone), 19-point automatic selection AF

Condition of AF point

automatic selection: AF point can be selected automatically in One-Shot AF

mode, using information on colors equivalent to skin

tones.

AF-assist beam: Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash

403

Specifications

• Exposure Control

Metering mode: 63-zone TTL full-aperture metering using 7560-pixel

RGB plus IR metering sensor

• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)

• Partial metering (approx. 6.0% of viewfinder at center)

• Spot metering (approx. 3.5% of viewfinder at center)

• Center-weighted average metering

Metering brightness range:

EV 1 - 20 (One-Shot AF at room temperature, ISO 100)

Exposure control: Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative

Auto, Portrait, Landscape, Close-up, Sports, Special

scene modes (Kids, Food, Candlelight, Night Portrait,

Handheld Night Scene, HDR Backlight Control),

Program), Shutter-pri ority AE, Aperture-priority AE,

Manual exposure

ISO speed

(Recommended

exposure index):

Basic Zone modes*: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set

automatically

* Landscape: ISO 100 - ISO 1600, <SCN> Handheld

Night Scene: ISO 100 - ISO 12800

Creative Zone modes: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set

manually (whole-stop increments), ISO 100 - ISO 6400

set automatically, maximum ISO speed settable for ISO

Auto, or ISO expansion to “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600)

Exposure

compensation: Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

AEB: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be

combined with manual exposure compensation)

AE lock: Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative

metering when focus is achieved

Manual: By AE lock button

Anti-flicker: Possible

•Shutter

Type: Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed: 1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (Total shutter speed range.

Available range var ies by shoo ting mode .), Bu lb, X-sync

at 1/200 sec.

• D rive System

Drive modes: Single shooting, Continuous shoot ing, Silent single

shooting, Silent cont inuous shooting,

Self-timer: 10-sec. delay/remote control, 2-sec. delay,

10-sec. delay with continuous shooting

Continuous shooting

speed: Continuous shooting: Max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.

Silent continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.

Specifications

404

Max. burst (Approx.) : JPEG Large/Fine: 180 (940) shots

RAW: 7 (8) shots

RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: 6 (6) shots

* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2

aspect ratio, ISO 100 and S t andard Picture S tyle) using

an 8 GB card.

* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible

8 GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.

•Flash

Built-in flash: Retractable, auto pop-up flash

Guide No.: Approx. 12/39.4 (IS O 100, in meters/feet)

Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view

Recycling time approx. 3 sec.

External flash: EX-series Speedlite

Flash metering: E-TTL II autoflash

Flash exposure

compensation: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

FE lock: Provided

PC terminal: None

Flash control: Built-in flash function settings, external Speedlite

function settings, external Speedlite Custom Function

settings

Wireless flash control via optical transmission possible

• Live View Shooting

Focus method: Hybrid CMOS AF III System (Face+ Tracking, F l exiZone-

Multi, FlexiZone-Single), Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x

magnification possible)

AF operation: One-Shot AF, Servo AF

Continuous AF: Provided

Focusing brightness range:

EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Touch shutter: Provided

Metering mode: Real-time metering with image sensor

Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering

(approx. 10% of Live Vie w screen), Spot metering

(approx. 2.7% of Live V i ew screen), Center-weighted

average metering

Metering brightness

range: EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Creative Filter: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,

Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect

Grid display: Two types

405

Specifications

• Movie Shooting

Recording format: MP4

Movie: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Variable (average) bit rate

Audio: AAC

Recording size and

frame rate: F ull HD (1920x1080) : 29.97p/25.00p/23.98p

HD (1280x720) : 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p

VGA (640x480) : 29.97p/25.00p

Compression method: Standard/Light

File size: Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)

(Standard) : Approx. 216 MB/min.

Full HD (29.97p/25.00p) (Light) : Approx. 87 MB/min.

HD (59.94p/50.00p) (Standard) : Approx. 187 MB/min.

HD (29.97p/25.00p) (Light) : Approx. 30 MB/min.

VGA (29.97p/25.00p) (Standard) : Approx. 66 MB/min.

VGA (29.97p/25.00p) (Light) : Approx. 23 MB/min.

HDR Movie Shooting : Approx. 94MB/min.

Focus method: Same as focusing with Live View shooting

Digital zoom: Approx. 3x to 10x

Movie Servo AF: Provided

Focusing brightness range:

EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, IS O 100)

Metering mode: Center-weighted averag e and evaluative metering with

the image sensor

* Automatically set by the focus method.

Metering brightness range:

EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, IS O 100)

Exposure control: Program AE for movies and manual exposure

Exposure

compensation: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

ISO speed

(Recommended

exposure index):

With autoexposure shooting:

ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically

With manual exposure: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set

automatically/manually, expandable to H (equivalent to

ISO 12800)

HDR movies: Possible

Miniature effect movie: Possible

Video sn apshots: Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.

Sound recording: Built-in stereo microphones

External stereo microphone termina l provided

Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,

attenuator provided

Grid display: Two types

Still photo shooting: Possible

Specifications

406

•LCD Monitor

Type: TFT color liquid-crystal monitor

Monitor size and dots: Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0-in.) (3:2 ) with appr ox. 1. 04 mi llion dots

Brightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)

Electronic level display: Possible

Interface languages: 25

Touch screen

technology: Capacitive sensing

Feature guide: Displayable

•Playback

Image display format: Single-image display (without shooting information),

Single-image display (with simple information), Single-

image display (Shooting infor mation displayed: Detailed

information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture

Style, Color space/noise reduct i on, Lens aberration

correction), Index display (4/9/36/100 images)

Zoom magnification: Approx. 1.5x - 10x

Highlight alert: Overexposed highlights blink

AF point display: Provided

Image browsing method: Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting

date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating

Image rotate: Possible

Ratings: Provided

Movie playback: Enabled (LCD monitor, audio/video OUT, HDMI OUT)

Built-in speaker

Image protect: Possible

Slide show: All images, by date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by

rating

Five transition effects selectable

Background music: Selectable for slide shows and movie playback

• Post-Processing of Images

Creative filters: Grainy B/W, Soft focu s, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,

Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect

Resize: Possible

Cropping: Possible

• D irect Printing

Compatible printers: PictBridge-compatible printers

Printable images: JPEG and RAW images

Print ordering: DPOF Ver sion 1.1 compatible

407

Specifications

• Custom Functions

Custom Functions: 14

My Menu registration: Possible

• Interface

Audio/video OUT/Digital

terminal: Analog vid eo (compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio

output

Hi-Speed USB equivalent: Computer communication,

Direct printing, GPS Receiver GP-E2, Connect Station

CS100 connection

HDMI mini OUT

terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compat ible

External microphone IN

terminal: 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack

Remote control terminal: For Remote Switch RS-60E3

Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6

Eye-Fi card: Compatible

•Power

Battery: Battery Pack LP-E17 (Quantity 1)

* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18

Number of possible

shots: With viewfinder shooting: Approx. 440 shots at room

temperature (23°C/73°F), approx. 400 shots at low

temperatures (0°C/32°F)

With Live View shooting: Approx. 180 shots at room

temperature (23°C/73°F), approx. 150 shots at low

temperatures (0°C/32°F)

* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17.

Movie shooting time: Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F)

Approx. 1 hr. at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)

* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17.

• Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 131.9 x 100.9 x 77.8 mm / 5.20 x 3.98 x 3.07 in.

Weight: Approx. 565 g / 19.93 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),

Approx. 520 g / 18.35 oz. (Body only)

• Operation Environment

Working temperature

range: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

Specifications

408

• B attery Pack LP-E17

Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Rated voltage: 7.2 V DC

Battery capacity: 1040 mAh

Working temperature

range: During charging: 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F

During shooting: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 33.0 x 14.0 x 49.4 mm / 1.30 x 0.55 x 1.94 in.

Weight: Approx. 45 g / 1.59 oz. (excluding protective cover)

• Battery Charger LC-E17

Compatible battery: Battery Pack LP-E17

Recharging time: Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature (23°C/73°F))

Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

Rated output: 8.4 V DC / 700 mA

Working temperature

range: 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 67.3 x 27.7 x 92.2 mm / 2.65 x 1.09 x 3.63 in.

(prongs retracted)

Weight: Approx. 85 g / 3 oz.

• Battery Charger LC-E17E

Compatible battery: Battery Pack LP-E17

Recharging time: Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature (23°C/73°F))

Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

Rated output: 8.4 V DC / 700 mA

Working temperature

range: 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 67.3 x 27.7 x 92.2 mm / 2.65 x 1.09 x 3.63 in.

(excluding power cord)

Weight: Approx. 80 g / 2.82 oz. (excluding power cord)

409

Specifications

• E F-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

Focal length / Aperture: 18 mm-135 mm f/3.5-5.6

Lens construction: 16 elements in 12 groups

Minimum aperture: f/22 - 36

* f/22-38 when 1/2-stop increme nts set for aperture.

Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20´ - 11°30´

Vertical extent: 45°30´ - 6°20´

Horizontal extent: 64°30´ - 9°30´

Closest focusing distance:

0.39 m / 1.2 8 ft.

Max. magnification: 0.28x (at 135 mm focal length)

Field of view:

Approx. 248 x 372 - 53 x 80 mm / 9.76 x 14.65 - 2.09 x

3.15 in. (at 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.)

Filter size: 67 mm

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 76.6 x 96.0 mm / 3.02 x 3.78 in.

Weight: Approx. 480 g / 16.9 oz.

Hood: EW-73B (sold separately)

Lens cap: E-67 II

Case: LP1116 (sold separately)

• E F-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

Focal length / Aperture: 18 mm-55 mm f/3.5-5.6

Lens construction: 13 elements in 11 groups

Minimum aperture: f/22 - 36

* f/22-38 when 1/2-stop increme nts set for aperture.

Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20´ - 27°50´

Vertical extent: 45°30´ - 15°40´

Horizontal extent: 64°30´ - 23°20´

Closest focusing distance:

0.25 m / 0.8 2 ft.

Max. magnification: 0.36x (at 55 mm focal length)

Field of view:

Approx. 129 x 199 - 42 x 63 mm / 5.08 x 7.83 - 1.65 x

2.48 in. (at 0.25 m / 0.82 ft.)

Filter size: 58 mm

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 69.0 x 75.2 mm / 2.72 x 2.96 in.

Weight: Approx. 205 g / 7.2 oz.

Hood: EW-63C (sold separately)

Lens cap: E-58 II

Case: LP1016 (sold separately)

Specifications

410

• E F-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM

Focal length / Aperture: 55 mm-250 mm f/4-5.6

Lens construction: 15 elements in 12 groups

Minimum aperture: f/22 - 32

Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 27°50´ - 6°15´

Vertical extent: 15°40´ - 3°30´

Horizon tal extent: 23° 20 ´ - 5° 2 0´

Closest focusing distance:

0.85 m / 2.7 9 ft.

Max. magnification: 0.29x (at 250 mm focal length)

Field of view:

Approx. 197 x 296 - 52 x 78 mm / 7.76 x 11.69 - 2.05 x

3.07 in. (at 0.85 m / 2.79 ft.)

Filter size: 58 mm

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 70.0 x 111.2 mm / 2.76 x 4.38 in.

Weight: Approx. 375 g / 13.2 oz.

Hood: ET-63 (sold separately)

Lens cap: E-58 II

Case: LP1019 (sold separately)

• E F-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

Focal length / Aperture: 18 mm-200 mm f/3.5-5.6

Lens construction: 16 elements in 12 groups

Minimum aperture: f/22 - 36

* f/22-38 when 1/2-stop increme nts set for aperture.

Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20´ - 7°50´

Vertical extent: 45°30´ - 4°20´

Horizon tal extent: 64° 30 ´ - 6° 3 0´

Closest focusing distance:

0.45 m / 1.5 ft.

Max. magnification: 0.24x (at 200 mm focal length)

Field of view:

Approx. 291 x 452 - 62 x 93 mm / 11.5 x 17.8 - 2.4 x 3.7 in.

(at 0.45 m

/ 1.48 ft.

)

Filter size: 72 mm

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 78.6 x 102 mm / 3.1 x 4.0 in.

Weight: Approx. 595 g / 21.0 oz.

Hood: EW-78D (sold separately)

Lens cap: E-72 II

Case: LP1116 (sold separately)

All the data above is based on Canon’ s testing st andards and CIPA (Camera &

Imaging Product s Association) testing standards and guidelines.

Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on

CIPA Guidelines (except weigh t for camera body only).

Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.

If a problem occur s with a non-Ca non lens a ttached to the camera, consult the

respective lens manufacturer.

411

Specifications

Trademarks

Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems I ncorporated.

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registere d trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of A pple Inc., registered i n the U.S. and

other countries.

SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definiti on Multimedia Interface are trademarks or

registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

About MPEG-4 Licensing

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be

used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video

that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a

video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.

No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”

* Notice displayed in English as required.

412

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended

This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with

genuine Canon accessories.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such

as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g.,

a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty

does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon

accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.

413

Digital Camera Model DS126481 Systems

This device complies with Par t 15 of the FCC Rules. Operat ion is subject to the

following two conditions: (1 ) Thi s device may not cause ha rmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference t hat may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for

class B digital devices, pursu ant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designe d to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause

harmful interferen ce to radio or television reception, which can be

determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged

to try to correct the int erference by one or more of the following

measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving ant enna.

— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

—

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digit al camera must be used

with this equipment in order to compl y with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part

15 of the FCC rules.

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise

specified in the man ual. If such chang es or mo dif icati ons should be made , you

could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

Canon U.S.A. Inc.

One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.

Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)

CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)

When connecting to and using a house hold power outlet, use only AC

Adapter Kit ACK- E18 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz, rated

output: 8.0 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire, overheating, or

electrical shock.

414

USA and Canada only:

The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is

recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on

how to recycle this battery.

For CA, USA only

Included li thi um b attery contains Pe rc hl ora te M ate ria l – s pecial handling may ap ply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/ for details.

CAUTION

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.

415

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /

Downloading Images to Your Computer

This chapter explain s ho w to view the Camera

Instruction Manual CD-ROM on your computer,

download images from the came ra to your computer,

gives an overview of the software in the EOS DIGITAL

Solution Disk (CD-ROM), and explains how to install the

software on your computer. It also explains how to view

the Software Instruction Manuals.

EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk

(Software/Software Instruction Manuals)

Camera Instruction

Manual

416

The Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM contains

instruction manuals (PDF files) related to this product.

To view the instruction manuals (PDF files), Adobe Reader 6.0 or higher

must be installed on your computer. Adobe Reader can be downloaded

free from the Internet. After installing Adobe Reader, follow the

procedure below.

1Insert the “CAMERA INSTRUCTION

MANUAL” CD-ROM into your computer .

2Double-click the CD-ROM.

With Windows, double-click on the CD-ROM icon in

[(My) Computer]. With Macintosh, double-click on

the CD-ROM icon on the desktop.

The icon displayed will differ depending on your

computer’s operating system.

3Double-click the START file.

The icon displayed will differ depending on your

computer’s operating system.

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

417

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

4Click your language.

5Click the instruction manual you want to

read.

The manual will be displayed.

You can save the PDF file to your computer.

To learn how to use Adobe Reader, refer to Adobe Reader’s Help

section.

418

You can use the EOS software to download the images in the camera to

your computer. There are two ways to do this.

1Install the software (p.421).

2Use the provided interface cable

to connect the cam era to your

computer.

Use the interface cable provided with

the camera.

Connect the cable to the camera’s

digital terminal with the cable plug’s

<D> icon facing the front of the

camera.

Connect the cord’s plug to the

computer’s USB terminal.

3Use EOS Utility to download the

images.

Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction

Manual (p.422).

Downloading Images to a Computer

Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer

If [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot be connected to a

computer. Set [Wi-Fi/NFC] to [Disable], then reconnect th e camera to a

compu te r wi t h an interface cable.

419

Downloading Images to a Computer

You can also use a card reader to download images to your computer.

1Install the software (p.421).

2Insert the card into the card

reader.

3Use Digital Photo Professional to

download the images.



Refer to the Digital Photo Professional

Instruction Manual (p.422).

Downloading Images with a Card Reader

When downloading images f r om the camera to your computer with a card

reader without using EOS soft ware, copy the DCIM folder on the card to

your computer.

420

EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk

Various software for EOS DIGITAL cameras are contained

on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk.

With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to

transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.

You can use this software to set various camera settings and shoot

remotely from the computer connected to the camera. Also, you can

copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music*, to the

card.

* You can use the background music as the soundtrack for a video snapshot

album, movie, or slide show played back with your camera.

This software is recommended for users who shoot RAW images. You

can view, edit, and print RAW images and JPEG images.

* Some functions dif fer between the version to be install ed on a 64-bit computer

and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.

You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style

files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in

processing images.

Software Overview

EOS Utility

Digital Photo Professional

Picture Style Editor

421

Insert the E O S D I GITAL Solution Disk into your computer.

For Macintosh, double-click to open the CD-ROM icon displayed

on the desktop, then double-click on [setup].

2Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen

instructions to install.

If the install screen for “Microsoft Silverlight” is displayed during

installation, install “Microsoft Silverlight”.

3Click [Restart] and remove the CD-ROM after the

computer restarts.

When the computer has restarted, the installation is complete.

Installing the Software

Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the

software. The software will not be installed correctly.

If a previous version is installed, follow the steps below to reinstall the

software. (The newer version will overwrite the previous version.)

422

Software Instruction Manuals are contained on the EOS

DIGITAL Solution Disk. You can copy and view the

software instruction manual (PDF files) as follows:

Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your computer.

2Close the install screen.

When the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk install screen appears,

close the install screen.

3Open the CD-ROM.

4Open the [Manual] folder.

5Copy the [English] fold er to your computer.

Instruction Manual PDFs with the names below are copied.

6Double-click the copied PDF file.

Adobe Reader (most recent version recommended) must be

installed on your computer.

Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet.

Software Instruction Manual

Windows Macintosh

EOS Utility EUx.xW_E_xx EUx.xM_E_xx

Digital Photo Professional DPPx.xW_E_xx DPPx.xM_E_xx

Picture Style Editor PSEx.xW_E_xx PSEx.xM_E_xx

423

Index

Numerics

10- or 2-sec. self-timer..................124

1280x720 ......................................245

1920x1080....................................245

19-point AF au t o selection ............114

640x480 ........................................245

A (Scene Intelligent Auto)............76

AC Adapter Kit ..............................365

Access lamp....................................40

Accessories.......................................3

Adobe RGB...................................156

AE lock..........................................172

AEB

(Auto exposure bracketing)...170, 352

AFAF area selec tion m ode...... .. .... 114

AF method........................218, 263

AF operation.....................110, 216

AF point ....................................114

AF point selection.....................116

AF-assist bea m........ ... ... .. .........354

Beep (Beeper) ..........................272

Difficult subjects for AF.....120, 224

Manual focusin g (MF).......121, 228

Out of focus ........ ..5 0 , 51 , 120 , 22 4

Recomposing..............................79

AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)..............112

AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ........79, 11 2

Ambience - b ased shots ........... .. ....100

Angle of view...................................48

Anti-flicker shooting.......... .............154

Aperture -pr io r ity AE ........ ............. .16 2

Area AF frame . ............. ... ............. ...3 0

Art bold effect........................212, 328

Aspect rat io..................... ... ...........130

Attenuator .....................................266

Auto Lighting Optimizer.................146

Auto Playback ... ... .. ............. ... ...... 308

Auto power off ........................ 42, 273

Auto reset.................. .. .............. .. . 278

Auto rotate vertical imag e s........... 2 81

Autofocus (AF) ..................... 110, 216

Automatic selection of

AF point................................ 114, 118

Av (Aperture-priority AE) .............. 162

A/V OUT (Audio/video output)...... 315

B/W (Monochrome) .............. 136, 139

Background blur ............................. 84

Background music........................ 311

Basic Zone modes.......................... 31

Battery....... ... ............. .. ... .... 36, 38, 43

Battery check.................................. 43

Battery Grip ............................ 43, 376

Beep (Beeper).................. ............ 272

Black-and-white

image............................ 100, 136, 139

Bracketing ............................ 145, 170

Brightness (exposure) .................. 169

Auto exposure bracketing

(AEB) ............................... 170, 352

Autoexposure lock (AE lock).... 172

Exposure compensation .......... 169

Measurement method

(metering mo de ).... .. .............. .. . 167

Built-in flash.................................. 176

BULB (bulb exposure).................. 166

C (Creative Auto)......................... 82

Cable........ 3, 312, 315, 334, 376, 418

Camera

Camera shake.......................... 173

Clear camera settings.............. 282

Holding the camer a................. ... 51

Settings display............... ......... 3 62

424

Index

Camera shake .... .. ... .. ...............5 0 , 51

Candlelight......................................93

Cards ..................................24, 39, 65

Card reminder .. ............. ... ... .....272

Formatting ..................................65

Low-level formatting ...................66

SD speed class ............................5

Troubleshooting....................40, 66

Write-protect switc h....................39

Center-weighted average

metering........................................168

Charger.....................................33, 36

Chromatic aberration correction ...151

Cleaning (image sensor).......286, 289

Clear camera se ttin gs... ... .. ... ... .....282

Clipped highlights .........................324

Close-up .........................................88

Color saturatio n ....... .. ... ................138

Color space

(color reproduction range) ............156

Color tempera t ur e. ... .. .............. .. ...142

Color tone ........... .. ............92, 93, 138

Continuous AF.... ............. .. ...........214

Continuous file nu m ber i ng. ... ... .. ...277

Continuous sh oot i ng..... ... .............122

Contrast ........................................138

Creative Auto..................................82

Creative filters.......................210, 326

J (Creative Zone ) icon........... .........8

Creative Zone modes .....................31

Cropping .......................................331

Cross-type focu sin g................... ...119

Custom Functio n s.... .. ................ ...350

Custom white bal an ce ..................143

Date/time........................................ 44

Daylight saving time....................... 45

DC Coupler .............. .................... 365

Default settings tables.................. 283

Depth-of-field preview .................. 164

Detailed informat ion ..................... 3 21

Dials

Main Dial.................................... 53

Mode Dial................................... 53

Quick Control Dial................. ... .. 5 4

Digital terminal ..................... 334, 418

Dioptric adjustment ........................ 51

Direct printing............................... 334

Distortion correction ..................... 151

Downloading images.................... 418

DPOF ........................................... 343

Dragging......................................... 63

Drive mode............... 28, 85, 122, 124

Dust Delete Data.. ... ................ ..... 287

Electronic leve l ............................. .. 7 0

Erasing images ............................ 318

Error codes.................. ................ . 399

Evaluative metering...................... 167

Exposure compensation............... 169

Exposure level increments........... 352

External flash ............................... 181

Extra Effect Shot ............................ 83

Eyecup ......................................... 367

Eye-Fi card........... ... ............. ... ..... 368

Eyepiece cover....................... 35, 367

FE lock ......................................... 179

Feature guide.. ............. ... .. ............. 73

FEB (Flash exposure bracketing)

... 186

425

Index

File extension................................278

File name ......................................277

File size... ... ... .. ..............127, 24 7 , 32 1

Filter effect ............................139, 326

Final image simulation..........207, 241

Fine (image-recording quality)........28

Firmware ver sion ....... .. ... ... .. ... ......382

First-curtain synchro nization.........187

Fish-eye effect ......................212, 328

Flash

Built-in flash..............................176

Custom Functio ns.......... .. ... .. ....188

Effective range..........................176

External flash. .. ... ... ............... .... 181

FE lock......................................179

Flash control.............................183

Flash exposure bracketing

(FEB) ........................................186

Flash exposure compensation

...178

Flash off..........................81, 85, 99

Flash sync speed......................182

Manual flash .....................187, 200

Red-eye reduction....................177

Shutter synchronization

(1st/2nd curtain)........................187

Wireless....................................187

Flash mode ...........................186, 187

Flash sync contacts ........................26

Flicker detection................... ..... 30 , 72

Focus indicator ... .. ................ ...........76

Focus lock.. ................ ............... ......79

Focus mode switch ...... ...4 7 , 121 , 22 8

Focusing 9 AF

Focusing point (AF point)..............114

Folder creation/s ele ct ion...............275

Food................................................92

Formatting (card initialization).........65

Frame rate ....................................245

Full High-Definition

(Full HD)....................... 233, 302, 312

Fully automatic shooting

(Scene Intelligent Auto).... ..............76

Functions settable by

shooting mode.............................. 370

Grainy B/W........................... 212, 327

Grid................................. 69, 214, 265

Handheld Night Scene ................... 95

HD ........................................ 302, 312

HDMI .................................... 302, 312

HDMI CEC. ... ............... ................ . 313

HDR Backlight Control ................... 96

HDR Movie Shooting.................... 249

High ISO speed noise reduction... 147

High-Defi nition (HD) mo vies

... 302, 312

Highlight alert ............................... 324

Highlight tone priority.................... 353

Histogram (Brig ht n es s/RG B ).. ... .. . 324

Hot shoe................................. 26, 181

Household power ......................... 365

ICC profile ......... ... ............... ......... 156

Illumination (LCD panel)................. 55

Image dust pre ve nt i on. ... ... ........... 286

Image review tim e ..... .. ................ . 273

Image-recording quality................ 126

Images

AF point display .... .. ... .............. 323

Auto playback .......................... 308

Auto rotate ............................... 281

Erasing..................................... 318

File numbering . ............. .. ......... 277

Highlight alert........................... 324

Histogram................................. 324

426

Index

Index display ............................292

Jump display

(image browsing)......................293

Magnified view..........................294

Manual rotate ...........................297

Playback...........................107, 291

Protecting .................................316

Rating.......................................298

Review time..............................273

Shooting information ................320

Slide show................................308

Transfer....................................368

Viewing on a TV se t ....... ..302, 312

Index display.... ... ............... ...........292

INFO. button .........................107, 362

ISO speed.....................................132

Automatic setting (Auto) ...........134

ISO expansion..........................352

Maximum ISO speed

for ISO Auto..............................133

JPEG ............................................127

Jump display.................................293

Kids.................................................91

Landscape..............................87, 136

Language selection.........................46

Large

(image-recording quality)........28, 329

LCD monitor .. ... ... .. ................ ....24, 41

Brightness adju stm e nt..............27 4

Electronic level .................... .. .....70

Image playback ................107, 291

Menu display .... ... .. .............59, 378

Screen color .............................285

Shooting function

settings...................28, 56, 67, 363

LCD panel ........ ........................ 24, 29

Lens ........ ... ............. ... ........ 25, 32 , 47

Chromatic aberration

correction................................. 151

Distortion corre ct i on............ .. ... 1 5 1

Image Stabilizer ......................... 50

Lock release .............................. 48

Peripheral illumination

correction................................. 150

Lighting/Scene-based shots......... 104

Live View shooting ................. 80, 201

AF operation .... ................ ........ 216

Aspect ratio.............................. 130

Continuous AF................... ...... 214

Face+Tracking......................... 218

FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 220

FlexiZone - Single.................... 222

Grid display.............................. 214

Information disp lay. .. ... .. ........... 204

Manual focusing (MF).............. 228

Metering timer.......................... 215

Possible shots.......................... 203

Quick Control ........................... 20 8

LOCK ............................................. 55

Long exposure noise reduction.... 148

Long exposures............................ 166

M (Manual exposure) ................... 165

Macro photog r aph y .............. ... ....... 88

Magnification........................ 228, 294

Main Dial .... ............. ... ............. .. ..... 53

Manual exposure.................. 165, 237

Manual focus (MF) ............... 121, 228

Manual reset ................................ 278

Manual selection of AF point........ 116

Maximum burst..... ... ... .. ... ..... 127, 128

Medium

(image-recording quality) ....... 28, 329

Memory cards 9 Cards

427

Index

Menu...............................................59

My Menu........ .. .............. .. .........360

Setting procedure........... ............60

Settings.....................................378

3 icon .........................................8

Metering mod e........ ... ............. .. ....167

Metering time r...... .............. .. .215, 26 5

MF (manual focusing)...........121, 228

Microphone ...................................234

Miniature effect .... ... ............. .21 3 , 32 8

Miniature effect mo vies ............. ... .25 1

Mirror lockup .............. ...........173, 35 6

Mode Dial............... .. .................31, 53

Monochrome.................100, 136, 139

Movies...........................................233

AE lock .......... .. .............. .. .........172

AF method........................244, 263

Attenuator.................................266

Autoexposure ...........................234

Editing.......................................306

Editing out first and

last scenes.. ................ ..............30 6

Enjoying movies .......................302

File size ....................................247

Frame rate.................. ... ...........245

Grid...........................................265

HDR Movie Shooting................249

Information display ...................239

Manual exposure shooting .......237

Manual focus ............................234

Metering timer...........................265

Miniature effect movie ..............251

Movie digital zoom....................248

Movie recording size.................245

Movie Servo AF........................263

Playback...................................304

Quick Control............................244

Recording size..........................245

Recording Time ........................247

Sound recording.......................266

Still photo shooting ...................242

Video snapshot album ............. 253

Video snapshots................. ... .. . 253

Viewing on a TV set....... ..302, 312

Wind filter................................. 266

Multi Shot Noise Reduction.......... 147

Multi function lock........................... 55

My Menu....................................... 360

Night Portrait .................................. 94

Night scenes............................. 94, 95

Noise reduction

High ISO speed........................ 147

Long exposures ....................... 148

Nomenclature ................................. 26

Non-Canon flash units.................. 182

Normal (image-recording quality)... 28

NTSC.................................... 245, 382

ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF)

... 111, 217

P (Program AE ). ... .. ............. ... ...... 158

PAL....................................... 245, 382

Partial metering ............................ 167

Peripheral illumination correction

... 150

Photobook set-up.........................347

PictBridge..................................... 333

Picture Style ................. 135, 137, 140

Pixel count...... ................ .............. 126

Playback............................... 107, 291

Portrait.................................... 86, 136

Possible shots ................ 43, 127, 203

Power

Auto power off.......................... 273

Battery check ............................. 43

Battery information................... 364

Household power..................... 365

Possible shots............ 43, 127, 203

428

Index

Recharge..............................36, 43

Recharge performance.............364

Pressing com ple tely................. .. ... ..52

Pressing halfway... ... ............. ... .......52

Printing..........................................333

Cropping...................................341

Page layout ..............................337

Paper settings ..........................336

Photobook set-up.....................347

Print order (DPOF) ................ ...343

Printing effects..........................338

Tilt correction............................341

Program AE ..................................158

Program shift ................................159

Protecting images.........................316

Q (Quick

Control)......... ... .57, 98, 208, 244, 300

Quick Control....57, 98, 208, 244, 300

Quick Control Dial...........................54

Rating mark ..................................298

Ratings..........................................298

RAW ........................ .. ... ..28, 127, 129

RAW+JPEG............... ... ..28, 127, 129

Recharge ..........................36, 43, 364

Red-eye red u ctio n ..... ... ............. ...177

Release shutte r witho u t card ........272

Remote control shooting...............366

Remote switch ..............................367

Resizing........................................329

Revert to default settings..............282

Rotation (image) ...........281, 297, 341

Safety precau tio n s........ ... ...............20

Scene icons ........ .. ............. ...206, 236

Scene Intelligent Auto.....................76

SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards

Second-curtain synchronization... 187

Self-timer...................................... 124

Sensitivity 9 ISO speed

Sensor cleaning ................... 286, 289

Sepia (monochrome)............ 100, 139

Servo AF ...................................... 217

Sharpness.................................... 138

Shooting function

settings....................... 28, 56, 67, 363

Shooting information display........ 320

Shooting mode.... .. ......................... 31

Av (Aperture-prior ity A E).......... 162

M (Manual exposure)............... 165

P (Program AE ) .......... .. ........... 1 5 8

Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ............ 160

A (Scene Intelligent Auto)....... 76

7 (Flash Off)........ .. ............. ... .. 8 1

C (Creative Auto) .................... 82

2 (Portrait)................................ 86

3 (Landscape)......................... 87

4 (Close-up).............. .. ... .......... 88

5 (Sp o r ts)...... ............. ... ... ....... 89

8 (Special scene) ................. 90

C(Kids) .................................. 91

P (Food)................................. 92

x (Candlelight) ..................... . 93

6 (Night Portrait) ................... 94

F (Handheld Night Scene) .... 95

G (HDR Backlight Control).... 96

Shutter but to n.................. .. ............. 5 2

Shutter-priority AE........................ 160

Shutter synchronization

(1st/2nd curt ain) ........ ................... 187

Silent shooting

Continuous shooting................ 122

Single shooting ........................ 12 2

Single

shooting.......... 85, 122, 371, 373, 375

Single-imag e dis play ............... .. ... 107

429

Index

Single-poin t AF .......... .. ................ .114

Slide show.................... ................ .308

Small

(image-r eco rd in g q ua lity) ........28, 329

Soft focus..............................212, 327

Software........................................420

Speaker.........................................304

Special scene mode........................90

Specifications................................401

Sports..............................................89

Sp o t m et e rin g.......... ... .. ............. ... .167

sRGB ............................................156

Stop down aperture.......................164

Strap ...............................................35

System map..................................376

Tapping ...........................................62

Temperature warning ............230, 268

Time zone .......................................44

Tone priority ..................................353

Tonin g effect (mo no chr o m e) ... .. ... .13 9

Touch beeping.................................63

Touch screen.....................27, 62, 295

Touch Shutter................................226

Toy came ra effect......... ... ......213, 328

Tripod socket ..................................27

Troubleshooting ............................385

Tv (Shutter-priority AE) .................160

USB (digital) terminal............334, 418

Video snapshot album ..................253

Video snapshots ...........................253

Video system ....... ... ......245, 312, 38 2

Viewfinder....................................... 30

Dioptric adjustm e n t .... ... .. ........... 5 1

Electronic level........................... 70

Flicker detectio n................. ........ 72

Grid display ................................ 69

Viewing on a TV set ............. 302, 312

Volum e (mo v ie pl ay b a ck) .... ... ... .. . 305

Water painting effe ct............. 212, 328

WB (white balanc e) ..... ................ . 142

White balance......... ................ ...... 142

Bracketing................................ 145

Correction ................................ 144

Custom..................................... 142

Personal................................... 143

Wi-Fi............................................. 380

Wind filter ..................................... 266

Wireless flash shooting ................ 189

Zone AF.. .............. .. ............. ... ... ... 114

The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of March 2015. For

information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,

contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,

refer to the Canon Web site.

Table of Contents

Canon 760D User Manual

Related Manuals